PE 1144 
 
 1849 
 

 
 ^ -Jill: W -'i 
 
 V^V° V^\^ %^<« 
 
 °o 
 
 ^ ; : 
 
 ',* * v 
 
 <•'». 
 
 
 f» t'Jx'V -^K^^o A^"^ 'TOW' c/'^jv 
 

 
 %, $ v £' .^Va\ >, .4 
 
 **v 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
RE€OMM£]f BATIOlf 
 
 Of the Ward School Teachers' Association of the City of 
 
 New York, 
 
 In presenting a set of elementary books for the adoption of 
 this Association, your Committee unanimously recommends the 
 following: 
 
 First : The Pictorial Primer, by R. Bentley. The Committee 
 would here observe, that the great object of this work seems to 
 be, to make study interesting and attractive to children from the 
 very commencement. The style is easy and familiar, the mat- 
 ter excellent and admirably arranged, and calculated to make an 
 impression on the mind which will produce a favourable result in 
 subsequent study. It is well calculated to promote the object 
 for which it was designed. 
 
 Second : The Pictorial Spelling Book, by the same author. 
 Much of the toil and labour which children generally undergo 
 while studying books of this kind, seems to be obviated in this ; 
 the variety and illustrations of the lessons ; each of which has for 
 its object the gradual improvement of the pupil. The lessons 
 are full and various, and several useful tables are introduced 
 which are not found in books of this kind. 
 
 Third : The Introduction to the Pictorial Reader, by the same 
 author. This is a continuation of this system of spelling and 
 reading books, and contains a great variety of easy and instruc- 
 tive lessons on familiar subjects, and so arranged and illustrated 
 k as to make study pleasing and inviting to children. The con- 
 I trasting ;; good and evil, kindness and cruelty, truth and false- 
 hood," throughout the work, and pressing upon the tender mind 
 a belief that the practice of virtue will render children happy, 
 while to follow vice will render them unhappy, are traits of ex-? 
 cellence highly commendatory. This is a work of gi^eat merit. 
 All of which is respectfully submitted. 
 
 f S. Durand, Chairman, 
 „ U4 4-l I Joseph W. Wright, 
 
 Committee > on the j H enry W. Hull. ? 
 Examination ^ Edward McElroy 
 of School Books. \ E H JennYj 
 
 LJohn Walsh, 
 The Committee respectfully submits to the Association, for 
 <ts adoption, the following resolution : 
 
 Resolved, That this Association recommends the adoption of 
 Bentley's Series of Books named in the accompanying report, 
 and that we individually will use our influence to secure their 
 
 immediate introduction into schools w T ith which we are con^ 
 
 nectea. 
 
 Adopted at a meeting of the Ward School Teachers 5 Asso* 
 ciation, July 23d, 1845. 
 
 Wm. Kennedy, Recording Secretary. 
 
Frontispiece to Bentley's Spelling-Book. 
 
THE 
 
 PICTORIAL 
 
 SPELLING BOOR: 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 Aii improved method of teaching ttie alphabet. 
 
 and likewise spelling and pronunciation, 
 
 by tli e nse of Pictures : interspersed 
 
 with a variety of useful and 
 
 INTERESTING 
 
 ILLUSTRATED WITH 
 
 TO WHICH ARE ADDED, 
 
 Examples for Spelling and Hefinsng words, by 
 placing them synonymously : 
 
 ALSO, 
 
 RULES AND EXAMPLES 
 FOR SPELLING DERIVATIVE WORDS; 
 
 AND EXAMPLES OF 
 
 PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES, WITH THEIR DEFINITIONS ; 
 
 With other useful and interesting* matter, being 1 an im- 
 provement on the English Spelling: Book. 
 
 The orthography and pronunciation adapted to the best usage. 
 
 BY RENSSELAER BENTLEY, 
 
 Author of the Pictorial Primer, American Instructer, Derivative 
 Expositor, &c. 
 
 NEW-YORK: 
 PUBLISHED BY PRATT WOODFORD & CO. 
 
 1849. 
 

 ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 In the elementary books published by the author some years ago, 
 the orthography and pronunciation of Walker's Dictionary was strictly 
 adhered to — the present work, not being confined to that Dictionary 
 as a standard, will, in some few words, differ from those formerly pub- 
 lished. In the present work, much care has been taken to ascertain 
 the most approved orthography and pronunciation of such words as 
 are considered doubtful or unsettled ; to accomplish an object so desi- 
 rable, reference has been had to our best speakers and writers, and 
 where their decisions have been corroborated by our best Dictiona- 
 aries, they have been adopted. 
 
 With proper respect for the opinions of others, we would here 
 briefly allude to the subject of synonymous words, which at present 
 seems to interest and engage public attention. By a careful examina- 
 tion of Crabb's English Synonymes, the most complete and scientific 
 work of the kind ever published in the English Language, and the 
 origin of all minor works, but few words will be found, comparatively 
 s eaking, that are strictly synonymous : although some writers have 
 ade the class very great. Their good intention is not doubted, nor 
 is this meant to detract from the merit of their works : but upon a 
 careful examination, much will be found, it is believed, in which " the 
 nice shades of distinction between words closely allied," are not suffi- 
 ciently preserved ; and therefore not in accordance with the settled 
 principles of the language. Popular opinion is often governed by 
 impulse, instead of sober reason and careful investigation; and 
 thereby errors, gross errors frequently pass unnoticed and uncor- 
 rected ; whereby much injury is done, not only to the rising genera- 
 tion, but to the purity of the language. 
 
 1899 f) 
 
 Entered, according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1839, by 
 Rensselaer Bentley, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of 
 the Southern District of New- York. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The Spelling Book, being usually the primary book of in- 
 struction, is, perhaps, the most important one, so far as edu- 
 cation is concerned, that is ever put into the hands of the pupil. 
 Being the guide and inductor to the whole round of literature 
 and science, it is naturally regarded, in the conceptions of the 
 child, as the representative of the train that follows. So if this 
 in itself be dull, or is made to produce the impression of dullness 
 upon the mind of the young scholar, the idea will inva- 
 riably be associated with every succeeding book of instruction. 
 Thus the business of study and learning, instead of being regard- 
 ed as a rational pleasure, becomes a spiritless and uninteresting 
 drudgery. This sense of disgust is sometimes heightened by 
 the injudicious teacher, in assigning lessons as a task or a pun- 
 ishment — a course never sufficiently to be reprehended. Hence 
 the origin of the complaint, so often made by parents in regard 
 to their children — that they cannot conquer their aversion to 
 books and to study, and consequently find unavailing eveiy ef- 
 fort to make them scholars. 
 
 Aware of these evils from personal experience in the business 
 of instruction, the author has been induced to attempt a remedy ; 
 how far he has succeeded, the public will decide. To this end, 
 he has endeavoured to render the gradations of ascent in the 
 pupil's incipient attainment, as easy and interesting as possible ; 
 and though his course must be " onward and upward" yet that 
 the toil of each succeeding step may be repaid by the novelty 
 and interest of new scenes. Thus, while it has been a oon^ 
 stant endeavour to interest and amuse, it has been with a strict 
 and ultimate regard to improvements To secure this object, 
 such words are inserted in the introductory spelling sections, as 
 will convey familiar and definite ideas to the child. Interspersed 
 with these words are pictures, designed not only to excite 
 the attention of the pupil, but also to enable him readily and 
 easily to comprehend the words themselves. Pictures are 
 
6 PREFACE. 
 
 also introduced as illustrations, (not as embellishments,) to the 
 reading lessons, in order to unfold the story, and render it more 
 attractive* Thus a pleasurable excitement will be produced in 
 the pupil's mind, and acquisition, it is believed, will cease to be 
 regarded as a drudgery. 
 
 In arranging the spelling lessons which are more difficult, the 
 words which have the same meaning, are classed together in 
 such a manner that each word defines its opposite : this gives 
 variety to the spelling exercises, and at the same time introdu- 
 ces the study of definitions. Concise rules and examples are 
 likewise given for spelling Derivative Words, (a subject almost 
 entirely neglected,) a knowledge of which, would correct many 
 of the gross errors so common among writers. The prefixes 
 and suffixes are also explained in the most familar terms ; with 
 examples, and full definitions : with many other useful and in- 
 interesting lessons. — The whole, adapted to the capacity and 
 comprehension of children. 
 
 Many excellent primers or picture-books have been published 
 for the use of children, with a view of substituting them for the 
 spelling-book ; but they seem to have entirely failed in their ob- 
 ject, in consequence of the great deficiency in the variety of 
 spelling lessons. The present work will contain, not only all 
 that is necessary in a spelling-book, but also the amusement so 
 eagerly sought for in picture-books, thus making " amusement 
 the vehicle of instruction" which is so great a desideratum. 
 
 The work is now submitted to the inspection of a candid and 
 enlightened community, with the hope that it will receive a thor- 
 ough and impartial examination ; believing those school books 
 which are best calculated to accelerate the improvement of 
 youth, and promote the objects for which they are designed, 
 will have the preference in our common schools, 
 
 New-York, May, 1839. 
 
 ^ygjTji, ;i -, :::rrrijOT@t 
 
RUDIMENTS OF THE 
 ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 
 
 The first principles or elements of pronunciation, are letters : 
 of which there are twenty -six in the English Language. 
 
 The letters when taken together, are called the English 
 Alphabet. 
 
 The Alphabet is divided into vowels and consonants. 
 
 A vowel is a letter which can be sounded by itself, without 
 the assistance of any other i'etter. 
 
 The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, and sometimes w, and y. 
 
 A consonant is a letter which cannot be fully sounded with- 
 out the help of a vowel. 
 
 The consonants are b, c, d,f, g, h, j, k, 7, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, 
 v, x, z, and sometimes w, and y. 
 
 A compound character is two consonants united, which re- 
 present a distinct simple sound. They are ch, sh, th, and ng. 
 
 The sounds of the Vowels. 
 
 A has five sounds : a long sound, as in pale ; a short sound, 
 as in pat ; a long broad sound, as in pall ; a flat sound, as in 
 far ; and a short broad sound, as in wad. 
 
 E has four sounds : a long sound, as in here ; a short sound, 
 as in hen ; the sound of u short, as in her ; and the sound of 
 a long, as in tete. 
 
 I has four sounds : a long sound, as in bite ; a short sound, 
 as in bit ; the sound of u short, as in bird ; and the sound of 
 e long, as in police. 
 
 O has six sounds : a long sound, as in note ; a long broad 
 sound, as in nor ; a short broad sound, as in not ; the sound of 
 oo proper, as in move ; the sound of oo short, as in wolf; and 
 the sound of u short, as in love. 
 
 U has three sounds : a long sound, as in cube ; a short 
 sound, as in cub ; and the sound of oo short, as in pull. 
 
 TV, when a vowel, has one sound ; which is the same that 
 u would have in the same situation ; as in how. 
 
 Y, when a vowel, has two sounds : a long sound, as in style ; 
 and a short sound, as in hymn. 
 
8 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Note. — The preceding sounds of the vowels are all represented by 
 figures in the following work: but they have some irregular sounds, 
 which are not defined by figures; the words which contain them are 
 classed together in the 66th section, and their pronunciation accurate- 
 ly pointed out. 
 
 The Diphthongs. 
 
 A diphthong is the union of two vowels uttered by one impulse 
 of the voice. 
 
 A proper diphthong is that in which both the vowels are sound- 
 ed. They are oi, oy, ou, and ow ; as in oil, boy, ounce, cow. 
 
 An improper diphthong has but one of the vowels sounded ; as 
 oa in boat, ea in beat. They are ai, ae, ao, au, aw, ay, ea ee, 
 ei, eo, eu, ew, ey, ia, ie, io, oa, oe, co, ua, ue, ui, uy.* 
 
 A triphthong is the union of three vowels ; as in lieu. 
 
 Sounds of the Consonants. 
 
 B has but one sound, as in bale. 
 
 C has four sounds : a hard sound like k, at the end of syl- 
 lables, and before a, o, u, I, r, and t ; as in card, cord, curd, 
 clog, crop, tract ; a soft sound like s, before e, i, and y, as in cell, 
 cite, cymbal ; the sound of sh, as in ocean, social ; and the sound 
 of z, as in suffice, discern. 
 
 D has one sound as in dime.\ 
 
 F has one sound, as in life ; except in of, in which it has the 
 sound of v. 
 
 G has two sounds : a hard sound ai the end of words, and 
 before a, o, u, I, and r ; as in gag, gone, gull, glut, grand : a 
 soft sound like j before e, i, and y ; as in gem, gibe, gyre. 
 There are exceptions to this last sound, which are defined in 
 the following work ; that is, where g is hard before e, i, and y. 
 
 H has but one sound, as in hat. 
 
 I, when a consonant, has the same sound that y would have 
 in the same situation : thus filial is pronounced filyal. 
 
 J has one sound, as in joke ; except in the word hallelujah, 
 pronounced halleluya. 
 
 * In the following work, when the improper diphthongs are used, the 
 vowels which have no sound are printed in Italic characters ; but 
 those which are sounded are printed in Roman characters. 
 
 t When the verbal termination ed is not preceded by d or t, the e 
 is generally silent and the d is added to the foregoing syllable ; or the 
 sound of d changed into t, which is added to the foregoing syllable : thus, 
 loved, named, cracked, mixed, are pronounced lovd, namd, crakt, mixt, 
 &c. 
 
fykruiummammte^amasmi 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 9 
 
 K has but one sound, as in kite. 
 
 J, has but one sound, as in line. 
 
 M has one uniform sound, as in man ; except in comptroller, 
 pronounced kontrolur. 
 
 N has two sounds : its proper sound as in net ; and the 
 sound of ng, as in thank, pronounced thangk. 
 
 P has a uniform sound, as in part ; except in cupboard, pro- 
 nounced kubburd. 
 
 Q has always the sound of k, and is followed by u, which 
 has the sound of w ; as in quill. 
 
 R has one sound, as in rice. 
 
 2 
 
 Re at the end of words, has the short sound of ur ; thus, 
 2 
 ji-bre is pronounced Ji-bur, &c. 
 
 S has four sounds : its proper sound, as in sin, silver ; the 
 sound of z, as in has, was ; the sound of sh, as in mansion, cen- 
 sure ; and the sound of zh, as in fusion, rasure. 
 
 T has three sounds : its proper sound, as in tin, turn ; the 
 sound of sh, as in nation, action ; and the sound of ch or tsh, as 
 in bas-tion, pronounced bas-tshun. 
 
 U, when a consonant, has the sound that w would have in the 
 same situation ; thus queen is pronounced kween. 
 
 V has one uniform sound, as in vine. 
 
 W, when a consonant, has but one sound, as in wine. 
 
 X has three sounds : its proper sound like ks, as in wax ; a 
 flat sound like gz, as in exist, pronounced egzist ; and the sound 
 of z at the beginning of words, as in Xenophon. 
 
 Y, when a consonant, has but one sound, as in youth. 
 
 Z has two sounds : its proper sound, as in zeal ; and the 
 sound of zh, as in glazier pronounced glazhur. 
 
 Ch has three sounds : its proper sound, as in chip ; the sound 
 of k, as in chord ; and the sound of sh, as in chaise. 
 
 Sh has but one sound, as in shine. 
 
 Ng has a sharp ringing sound, as in bring ; but when fol- 
 lowed by e, the g takes the sound of j, as in strange. 
 
 Th has two sounds : the one sharp, as in think, thin ; the 
 other flat, as in these, them. 
 
 Gh sounds like/*, as in rough ; unless otherwise defined. 
 
 Ph sounds like/*, as in phrase ; unless otherwise defined. 
 
 Aw and au, when printed in Roman characters, have the 
 sound of broad a long ; as in law, haul. 
 
 Ew has the sound of u long, as in hew, mew. 
 
10 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Of Words > Accent, Emphasis, and Cadence. 
 
 A letter is the first element, or least part of a word. 
 
 A syllable is a letter, or union of letters, which can be pro- 
 nounced by one impulse of the voice. 
 
 Words are articulate sounds, used by common consent, as 
 signs of our ideas. 
 
 A word of one syllable is called a monosyllable. 
 
 A word of two syllables is called a dissyllable. 
 
 A word of three syllables is called a trisyllable. 
 
 A word of four or more syllables is called a polysyllable. 
 
 Words are primitive, derivative, or compound. 
 
 A primitive word is that which cannot be reduced to any 
 simpler word in the language ; as love, care. 
 
 A derivative word is formed of the primitive, and some dif- 
 ferent termination, or an additional syllable or syllables ; as 
 love-ly, cares, care-ful, care-ful-ness. 
 
 A compound word is sometimes formed of two primitive 
 words, as hat-band, ink-stand ; and sometimes of a primitive 
 and derivative ; as whipping-post, singing-master. 
 
 Spelling is the art of expressing words by their proper letters. 
 
 Accent is a forcible stress of the voice on a letter or sylla- 
 ble, in order to distinguish it from other letters or syllables in 
 the same word : as in ob'-ject, a-ban' -don. 
 
 Emphasis is a particular force of the voice, by which we 
 distinguish the most important word or words in a sentence. 
 
 Cadence is a depression of the voice in reading or speaking, 
 and generally takes place at the close of a sentence. 
 
 Rules to be observed in using the following 
 work. 
 
 The silent letters, except s, are printed in Italic characters. 
 
 S, when printed in Italic, has the sound of z, as in rose. 
 
 The syllables tion, and sion, are pronounced like shun. 
 
 When e terminates a syllable preceded by a consonant, 
 where the preceding vowel sound in the same syllable is long, 
 it is printed in a Roman character ; in other terminations it is 
 printed in Italic. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 11 
 
 In the spelling sections of the following work, the letters, 
 have their proper sounds, unless otherwise denned. G has its 
 hard sound at the end of words, and before a, o, u, I, and f, 
 and its soft sound before e, e, and y ; c has the sound of k be- 
 fore a, o, u, I, r, and t, and the sound of s before e, i, and y ; 
 and ch has its proper sound ; unless otherwise defined. Ee, 
 oo f 11, ff, ss, gg, ck, &c. are all printed in Roman characters, 
 although one letter would be sufficient to express the sound. 
 
 A TABLE, 
 
 Representing the different sounds of the simple and diphthongal 
 vowels referred to by the figures in the following work. 
 
 Figure 1 represents 
 
 I 1 1 
 
 the long sound of a, as in blame, pave'-ment ; 
 
 II 11 
 the long sound of e or ee, as in mere, meet ; 
 
 I 1 1 
 
 the long sound of i, as in mine, prime ; 
 
 II 11 
 the long sound of o or oo, as in dote, door ; 
 
 11 11 
 
 the long sound of u or ew, as in in mute, mewl ; 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 the long sound of y, as in type, ty'-rant. 
 
 Figure 2 represents 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 the short sound of a, as in mat, mar'-ry ; 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 the short sound of e, as in bet, bet'-ter ; 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 the short sound of i, as in pin, pim'-ple ; 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 the short sound of u, as in drum, rum'-ble ; 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 the short sound of y, as in hymn, sys'-tem. 
 
 Figure 3 represents 
 3 3 3 
 
 the long sound of broad a, as in wall, wa'-ter ; 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 the long sound of broad a, made by au or aw, as in caul, law ; 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 the long sound of broad a made by o, as in corn, morn. 
 
12 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Figure 4 represents 
 4 4 4 4 
 
 the flat sound of a, as in harm, farm, mar'-ket. 
 
 Figure 5 represents 
 
 5 5 
 the short sound of broad a, as in wad, wal'-let \ 
 
 5 5 
 the short sound of broad o, as in not, mod'-ern. 
 
 Figure 6 represents 
 
 the sound of oo proper, as in noon, gloom'-y ; 
 
 6 
 the sound of oo proper made by o, as in prove. 
 
 Figure 7 represents 
 7 7 
 
 the sound of oo short, as in good, wool'-ly ; 
 
 7 7 
 the sound of oo short made by o, as in wolf, couZd ; 
 
 7 7 
 the sound of oo short made by u, as in full, pull. 
 
 Figure 8 represents 
 
 the sound of u short made by e, as in her ; 
 
 8 8 
 the sound of u short made by t, as in bird, dirt ; 
 
 8 8 
 
 the sound of u short made by o or oo, as in love, flood. 
 
 Figure 9 represents 
 
 9 9 
 the sound of a long made by e, as in tete, rein. 
 
 Figure 10 represents 
 
 10 10 
 the sound of e long made by i, as in shire, pique. 
 
 The diphthongs oi and oz/, represent 
 
 3 2 I oi of 
 
 the long broad o, and the short i or long e, as in boil, cloy 
 
 The diphthongs ou and oio, represent 
 
 3 7 ou ow 
 
 the long broad o, and the short oo, as in pound, brow. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 13 
 
 Questions for exercise in the sounds of the letters. 
 
 Q. What sound has a in name? A. A long sound 
 What sound has a in man? 
 
 Q 
 
 Q. What sound has a in hall ? 
 Q. What sound has a in farm? 
 Q. What sound has a in wad ? 
 Q. What sound has e in mere ? 
 Q. What sound has e in hemp ? 
 Q. What sound has e in her ? 
 Q. What sound has e in there ? 
 Q. What sound has i in mine ? 
 Q. What sound has i in limp ? 
 Q. What sound has i in bird ? 
 Q. What sound has i in shire ? 
 Q- What sound has o in mope ? 
 Q. What sound has o in morn ? 
 Q. What sound has o in bond? 
 Q. What sound has o in prove ? 
 Q. What sound has o in wolf? 
 Q. What sound has o in come ? 
 Q. What sound has u in cw&e ? 
 Q . What sound has u in tan ? 
 Q. What sound has m in pull? 
 Q. What sound has y in sft/fo ? 
 Q. What sound has # in hymn ? 
 
 A. A short sound. 
 
 A. A long broad sound. 
 
 A. A flat sound. 
 
 -4. A short broad sound. 
 
 A. A long sound. 
 
 A, A short sound. 
 
 -4. The sound of u short. 
 
 A. The sound of a long. 
 
 A. A long sound. 
 
 A. A short sound. 
 
 -4. The sound of u short. 
 
 A. The sound of e long. 
 
 A. A long sound. 
 
 ^L.The long sound of broad a. 
 
 A. A short broad sound. 
 
 A. The sound of oo proper. 
 
 A. The sound of oo short. 
 
 A. The sound of u short. 
 
 ^i. A long sound. 
 
 A, A short sound. 
 
 A, The sound of oo short. 
 
 A. A long sound. 
 
 A. A short sound. 
 
 Q. What sound has c in cash? 
 Q. What sound has c in czte ? 
 Q. What sound has g in game ? 
 Q. What sound has g in ^em ? 
 Q. What sound has n in can-ker ? 
 Q. What sound has s in sing ? 
 Q. What sound has s in was ? 
 Q. What sound has x in wax ? 
 Q. What sound has x in ex-act? 
 Q. What sound has ch in chip ? 
 Q. What sound has ch in chaise ? 
 Q. What sound has ph in phrase ? 
 Q. What sound has g7& in tough ? 
 
 A. The sound of A\ 
 
 A. The sound of s. 
 
 A. Its hard sound. 
 
 A. A soft sound like,;. 
 
 .4. The sound of ng. 
 
 A. Its proper sound. 
 
 A. The sound of z. 
 
 ^4. Its proper sound ; like&s. 
 
 ^4. The sound of gz. 
 
 A. Its proper sound. 
 
 A. The sound of sh. 
 
 A. The sound of/. 
 
 A The sound of/. 
 
 Note. — By exercising the learner in the foregoing, and similar ques- 
 tions, he will soon become acquainted with the various sounds of the 
 lette rs, w hich is of the utmost importance. j 
 
14 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 The Alphabet rendered familiar by Pictures. 
 
 The study of the Alphabet is generally uninteresting to children; but by as- 
 sociating the letters with pictures, the mind becomes strengthened, and the 
 learner pleased: It is believed that children will commit the alphabet to mem- 
 ory in this manner, in less than half the time occupied in the usual way. 
 
 A a 
 
 for 
 
 Apple 
 
 H h 
 
 for 
 
 Harp 
 
 jj 
 
 for 
 
 Jug 
 
 M m 
 
 for 
 
 Man 
 
 S s 
 
 for 
 
 Shoe 
 
 T t 
 
 for 
 
 Top 
 
 Yy 
 
 for 
 
 Yoke 
 
 & 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 15 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 • Those who prefer the common method of teaching the Alphabet, as arrang- 
 ed on this page, can pursue it : those who prefer teaching it by the assistance 
 of pictures, can use the preceding page ; and those who wish a classification, 
 can make use of the following page. To change frequently from one page to 
 another, will prove highly advantageous to the learner. 
 
 Roman Letters, 
 
 Italic, 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 B 
 
 b 
 
 B 
 
 b 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 D 
 
 d 
 
 D 
 
 d 
 
 E 
 
 e 
 
 E 
 
 e 
 
 F 
 G 
 H 
 
 f 
 
 g 
 h 
 
 F 
 G 
 H 
 
 f 
 
 g 
 h 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 i 
 
 K 
 
 k 
 
 K 
 
 L 
 
 1 
 
 L 
 
 I 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 N 
 
 n 
 
 N 
 
 n 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 Q 
 R 
 
 P 
 
 q 
 
 r 
 
 P 
 
 Q 
 R 
 
 P 
 r 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 T 
 
 t 
 
 T 
 
 t 
 
 U 
 
 u 
 
 U 
 
 u 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 Y 
 Z 
 
 y 
 
 z 
 
 Y 
 Z 
 
 y 
 
 z 
 
 &* 
 
 4 
 
 .* 
 
 Antique, 
 
 b 
 c 
 d 
 
 e 
 f 
 
 g 
 h 
 
 ■ 
 
 i 
 J 
 
 D 
 
 E 
 
 r 
 a 
 
 T 
 
 Y 
 Z 
 
 ik 
 
 S 5 
 
 & 
 
 Names. 
 
 a 
 
 be 
 
 se 
 
 de 
 
 e 
 
 ef 
 
 je 
 
 aytch 
 
 i 
 
 ka 
 
 el 
 
 em 
 
 crs 
 
 o 
 
 pe 
 
 ku 
 
 r 
 
 ar 
 
 s 
 
 t 
 
 es 
 te 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 w 
 
 ve 
 
 double u 
 eks 
 
 y 
 
 Wl 
 
 ze 
 
 and 
 
 Double Letters. 
 
 fi, ff, fl, ffi, ffl. 
 
 This is a character standing for the word and. 
 
16 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 
 Classification of the Alphabet. 
 
 
 LESSON I. LESSON V. 
 
 a 
 
 e i o a 
 
 ka la ma na pa 
 
 a 
 
 e i o u 
 
 ke le me ne pe 
 
 a 
 
 e i o u 
 
 ki li mi ni pi 
 
 a 
 
 e i o u 
 
 ko lo mo no po 
 
 a 
 
 e i o u 
 
 kuluuiunupn 
 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 b 
 
 d f h j 
 
 r s t v z 
 
 b 
 
 d f h j 
 
 f s t v z 
 
 b 
 
 d f h j 
 
 r s t v z 
 
 b 
 
 d f h j 
 
 f s t v z 
 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 ba da fa ha Ja 
 
 ra sa ta va za 
 
 be de fe he je 
 
 re se te ve ze 
 
 bi 
 
 di fi hi ji 
 
 ri si ti vi zi 
 
 bo do f © ho jo 
 
 f© so to v© z© 
 
 bu du f u ha ju 
 
 FU SU til vu zu 
 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 k 
 
 1 111 11 P 
 
 c s q w x y 
 
 k 
 
 1 111 n p 
 
 c g q w x y 
 
 k 
 
 1 in ii p 
 
 c s q w x y 
 
 k 
 
 1 in n p 
 
 c s q w x y 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 17 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 ab ad ak 
 
 al 
 
 ela bra pra 
 
 eb ed ek 
 
 el 
 
 cle bre pre 
 
 ib id ik 
 
 11 
 
 cli bri pri 
 
 ob ©d ©k 
 
 ©1 
 
 cl© br© pr© 
 
 ab ad ak 
 
 til 
 
 clu bra pra 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 am an ap 
 
 ar 
 
 fra tra gra 
 
 em en ep 
 
 er 
 
 fre tre gre 
 
 iiii in ip 
 
 ir 
 
 fri tri gri 
 
 ©in on op 
 
 or 
 
 f r© tro gr© 
 
 uni un ap 
 
 ar 
 
 fra tra gra 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 at ag a? 
 
 az 
 
 dra sta spa 
 
 et eg ev 
 
 ez 
 
 dre ste spe 
 
 it ig iv 
 
 is 
 
 dri sti spi 
 
 ot ©g ©V 
 
 ©z 
 
 dr© sto sp© 
 
 at ag ny 
 
 uz 
 
 dra sta spa 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 bla pia 
 
 sia 
 
 spla spra stra 
 
 ble pie 
 
 sle 
 
 sple spre stre 
 
 bli pii 
 
 sli 
 
 spli spri stri 
 
 bl© pi© 
 
 si© 
 
 spl© spr© str© 
 
 bin pin 
 
 sin 
 
 splu spru stra 
 
 
 2> 
 
 i — • — ' 
 
18 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 Easy words of three letters. 
 In order to make study interesting to children from the beginning, 
 and bring every thing within their comprehension ; pictures, repre- 
 senting objects with which they are familiar, are inserted at the begin- 
 ning of several sections, to assist the little learner in pronouncing 
 words. After calling the letters, by a single glance of the eye he sees 
 the picture, and being assisted at the same time both by sight and sound, 
 he is enabled to pronounce the word without the least difficulty. In 
 this manner he becomes pleased with the exercise, and considers it as 
 an amusement, rather than a task. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 Fly 
 
 Bug 
 
 Cup 
 
 Cap 
 
 2 
 
 Hat 
 
f"""" 1 """" 1 " " 
 
 THE 
 
 PICTORIAL 
 
 SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 19 
 
 Note.— 
 
 -After elucidating the 
 
 pronunciation of words 
 
 by pictures, 
 
 at the beg 
 
 inning of each section, 
 
 the pupil will find but little difficulty 
 
 in pronouncing thove 
 
 which follow, as they 
 
 are equally 
 
 simple and 
 
 easy. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 LEvSSON II. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 map 
 
 bad 
 
 rag 
 
 fig 
 
 bit 
 
 bid 
 
 tap 
 
 had 
 
 sag 
 
 dig 
 
 hit 
 
 did 
 
 nap 
 
 sad 
 
 hag 
 
 rig 
 
 fit 
 
 hid 
 
 sap 
 
 mad 
 
 cag 
 
 wig 
 
 sit 
 
 lid 
 
 hap 
 
 pad 
 
 lag 
 
 jig 
 
 wit 
 
 rid 
 
 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 ban 
 
 let 
 
 den 
 
 tin 
 
 dip 
 
 tug 
 
 can 
 
 net 
 
 men 
 
 sin 
 
 tip 
 
 dug 
 
 pan 
 
 met 
 
 pen 
 
 pin 
 
 iip 
 
 hug 
 
 ran 
 
 pet 
 
 fen 
 
 kin 
 
 rip 
 
 lug 
 
 tan 
 
 set 
 
 hen 
 
 fin 
 
 hip 
 
 P u g 
 
 van 
 
 wet 
 
 wen 
 
 din 
 
 nip 
 
 rug 
 
 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 mop 
 
 dot 
 
 fob 
 
 bog 
 
 fat 
 
 dun 
 
 sop 
 
 cot 
 
 job 
 
 dog 
 
 rat 
 
 pun 
 
 lop 
 
 hot 
 
 rob 
 
 fog 
 
 mat 
 
 run 
 
 hop 
 
 lot 
 
 lob 
 
 log 
 
 sat 
 
 fun 
 
 fop 
 
 rot 
 
 mob 
 
 cog 
 
 pat 
 
 nun 
 
 pop 
 
 sot 
 
 cob 
 
 j°g 
 
 vat 
 
 tun 
 
 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 bud 
 
 gum 
 
 hut 
 
 tag 
 
 mix 
 
 beg 
 
 cud 
 
 rum 
 
 cut 
 
 wag 
 
 fix 
 
 hem 
 
 mud 
 
 hum 
 
 rut 
 
 nag 
 
 six 
 
 kid 
 
 rib 
 
 dim 
 
 but 
 
 cup 
 
 lax 
 
 web 
 
 nib 
 
 rim 
 
 jut 
 
 rub 
 
 tax 
 
 and 
 
 bib 
 
 him 
 
 nut 
 
 cub 
 
 wax 
 
 end 
 
20 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 Easy ivords of four letters. 
 
 Note. — Pictures are used in the spelling sections, not only to assist children 
 in pronouncing words, but to give them some definite idea of their meaning : 
 and as a continued exercise in spelling often becomes tiresome, the teacher 
 should exercise his pupils occasionally in answering questions, which will be 
 both profitable and amusing. For example — What does the first picture on 
 this page represent? A colt. What is a colt ? A young horse. How many 
 legs has he 7 Four. How many ears has he ? Two. What is a colt called 
 when full grown? A horse. The questions should be familiar, and adapted 
 to the capacity of the learner. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 Mule 
 
 Swan 
 
 Wasp 
 
 Cage 
 
 Face 
 
 2 
 
 Hand 
 
 Lamp 
 
 Flag 
 
 Gate 
 
 Ship 
 
 Pump ^ 
 
■ 
 
 THE 
 
 PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 21 
 
 
 
 LESSON 
 
 ii. 
 
 
 The words 
 
 in each section are arranged, under 
 figures, in alphabetical order. 
 
 the different 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 l 
 
 I 
 
 Bake 
 
 hold 
 
 mire 
 
 puke 
 
 tube 
 
 cake 
 
 home 
 
 5 mode 
 
 rake 
 
 wife 
 
 case 
 
 host 
 
 mope 
 
 rate 
 
 wire 
 
 cave 
 
 June 
 
 most 
 
 ride 
 
 2 
 
 code 
 
 lake 
 
 pace 
 
 ripe 
 
 bran 
 
 cube 
 
 late 
 
 pate 
 
 robe 
 
 bung 
 
 dose 
 
 life 
 
 pave 
 
 rove 
 
 cash 
 
 duke 
 
 like 
 
 pike 
 
 safe 
 
 chin 
 
 fort 
 
 lime 
 
 pipe 
 
 sage 
 
 chip 
 
 game 
 
 lure 
 
 pork 
 
 sake 
 
 chit 
 
 hind 
 
 lute 
 
 past 
 
 tore 
 
 crag 
 
 
 
 LESSON ] 
 
 Here is a 
 
 [ii. 
 
 i dog, a cat, 
 
 and a rat. 
 
 Iffi 
 
 
 
 The dog 
 
 bit the cat ; 
 
 
 
 The cat 
 
 oit the rat ; 
 
 
 
 pggjjl 
 
 The rat eat the corn 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 Cram 
 
 fish 
 
 grum 
 
 husk 
 
 plug 
 
 crib 
 
 fist 
 
 gush 
 
 king 
 
 rend 
 
 curb 
 
 flat 
 
 gust 
 
 lash 
 
 rich 
 
 dash 
 
 flax 
 
 hang 
 
 left 
 
 rush 
 
 ding 
 
 fled 
 
 hack 
 
 limp 
 
 rust 
 
 dint 
 
 flip 
 
 hast 
 
 lint 
 
 skin 
 
 dish 
 
 fret 
 
 held 
 
 lisp 
 
 shun 
 
 disk 
 
 fund 
 
 hemp 
 
 list 
 
 silk 
 
 drip 
 
 gash 
 
 hint 
 
 lurk 
 
 sing 
 
 drug 
 
 glib 
 
 hunt 
 
 milk 
 
 sled 
 
 dusk 
 
 grin 
 
 hurl 
 
 must 
 
 spin 
 
 fact 
 
 grit 
 
 hurt 
 
 plan 
 
 split 
 
22 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 Easy words of one syllable, in which there are no 
 
 silent letters. 
 
 Blade 
 
 blame 
 
 blind 
 
 bold 
 
 bone 
 
 brace 
 
 brave 
 
 bribe 
 
 bride 
 
 chase 
 
 Grope 
 
 grove 
 
 haste 
 
 hate 
 
 haze 
 
 hone 
 
 hope 
 
 huge 
 
 jole 
 
 jolt 
 
 child 
 
 chime 
 
 chine 
 
 clave 
 
 cone 
 
 cope 
 
 cove 
 
 crane 
 
 crape 
 
 dace 
 
 1 
 
 lace 
 lure 
 mace 
 make 
 mate 
 mice 
 mute 
 nice 
 note 
 page 
 
 LESSON I. 
 1 
 
 dare 
 
 date 
 
 dike 
 
 dine 
 
 dire 
 
 dolt 
 
 dote 
 
 drake 
 
 drone 
 
 drove 
 
 l 
 
 fade 
 fame 
 fate 
 fife 
 fine 
 find 
 flake 
 flare 
 flute 
 frame 
 
 l 
 gale 
 gave 
 glade 
 glaze 
 gold 
 grace 
 grape 
 grave 
 graze 
 grind 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 Here is my top ; 
 Here is my kite ; 
 And here is my ball. 
 Now let us go and play. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 1 
 
 pine 
 
 plume 
 
 pope 
 
 porch 
 
 pore 
 
 pride 
 
 prime 
 
 prize 
 
 probe 
 
 prone 
 
 l 
 rage 
 rare 
 rive 
 rope 
 same 
 sane 
 shade 
 shame 
 share 
 shave 
 
 l 
 shine 
 slate 
 slice 
 slope 
 smile 
 smote 
 snake 
 snare 
 snipe 
 sold 
 

 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 Space 
 
 state 
 
 tone 
 
 blend 
 
 crash 
 
 spade 
 
 stave 
 
 trace 
 
 blush 
 
 crest 
 
 spare 
 
 stone 
 
 trite 
 
 brad 
 
 crimp 
 
 spice 
 
 store 
 
 twice 
 
 brand 
 
 crisp 
 
 spike 
 
 stove 
 
 twine 
 
 brim 
 
 crush 
 
 spine 
 
 swore 
 
 I type 
 
 brisk 
 
 crust 
 
 spire 
 
 take 
 
 vote 
 
 champ 
 
 damp 
 
 spite 
 
 tame 
 
 wake 
 
 chest 
 
 dram 
 
 splice 
 
 tape 
 
 wild 
 
 clash 
 
 drift 
 
 spoke 
 
 taste 
 
 wile 
 
 cleft 
 
 drub 
 
 sport 
 
 tide 
 
 wine 
 
 cling 
 
 flash 
 
 stage 
 
 told 
 
 zone 
 
 LESSON v. 
 
 club 
 
 flesh 
 
 
 
 *1W diiil 
 
 The ape has got a nat. 
 
 
 
 wmgi 
 
 It is not Luke's hat, 
 
 
 
 .•iiiitiiilll 
 
 
 Is it Dick' 
 
 Oh, no, it 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 s hat? 
 is my hat 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 Flush 
 
 musk 
 
 sham 
 
 stab 
 
 swift 
 
 fresh 
 
 nest 
 
 shed 
 
 stamp 
 
 swing 
 
 glad 
 
 next 
 
 skip 
 
 stand 
 
 tend 
 
 gland 
 
 pang 
 
 slab 
 
 stem 
 
 tent 
 
 grand 
 
 plant 
 
 slim 
 
 step 
 
 text 
 
 grim 
 
 print 
 
 slut 
 
 sting 
 
 trap 
 
 grist 
 
 rash 
 
 smut 
 
 strap 
 
 trust 
 
 land 
 
 rusk 
 
 snag 
 
 strip 
 
 vest 
 
 lump 
 
 sand 
 
 span 
 
 strut 
 
 west 
 
 mend 
 
 sect 
 
 spend 
 
 stun 
 
 wing 
 
 mint 
 
 self 
 
 spur 
 
 stunt 
 
 wish 
 
 much 
 
 send 
 
 spurn 
 
 surf 
 
 zest j 
 
 „ — 1 
 
If 
 
 24 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 Easy words of two syllables, accented on thejirsU 
 
 Note. — Figures are placed over the vowels of the accented syllables, 
 which show their true sound, as explained in the key to this work ; and one 
 figure denotes the sound of the vowels in the accented syllables which are 
 placed under it, or which follow in that column, until another figure occurs. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 Cam' el 
 
 Li' on 
 
 Par' rot 
 
 Rab' bit 
 
 Ink' stand 
 
 Bot' tie 
 
 Buc' kle 
 
 Cra' die 
 
 Grind' stone 
 
 Can' non 
 
 Lan' tern 
 
 Mor' tar 
 
 Pad' lock 
 
 Pis' tol 
 
 Sad' die 
 
 Ra' zor 
 
 So' fa 
 
 
 An' vil 
 
 
 BpSPllIi^v^ 
 
 ZSSuag 
 
 Wag' on 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 25 
 
 Baby 
 
 cri sis 
 
 ba sis 
 
 de cent 
 
 bi as 
 
 de mon 
 
 bo ny 
 
 di er 
 
 bri er* 
 
 di et 
 
 ca per 
 
 fe ver 
 
 ci der 
 
 fe male 
 
 cli ent 
 
 fi nal 
 
 clo ver 
 
 flu ent 
 
 era zy 
 
 flu id 
 
 en er 
 
 fra mer 
 
 LESSON II. 
 1 
 
 f u ry 
 gi ant 
 gravy 
 ha ter 
 he ro 
 hu man 
 
 J ur y 
 
 lady 
 la zy 
 le gal 
 libel 
 
 na vy 
 pa per 
 pi lot 
 po em 
 po et 
 po ny 
 pu ny 
 ri der 
 ri ot 
 ri val 
 ro ver 
 
 
 sha dy 
 smo ker 
 so ber 
 spi cy 
 spi der 
 ti dy 
 to ry 
 tra der 
 tri al 
 tu tor 
 va cant 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 Here is Frank; hear him read. 
 His book is on the stand. 
 He has a pen in his hand. 
 He wears a small black hat ; 
 And a pair of new shoes. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 2 2 
 
 after 
 al um 
 at las 
 ban ish 
 bit ter 
 bui fet 
 but ter 
 cab in 
 can did 
 can dy 
 car rot 
 
 va ry 
 vi brate 
 vi per 
 vi tal 
 vo cal 
 wa fer 
 wa ger 
 
 2 
 
 ab sent 
 at om 
 ac tor 
 
 car ry 
 civ il 
 city 
 dif fer 
 din ner 
 diz zy 
 dus ty 
 el der 
 en vy 
 fan cy 
 gal Ion 
 
 * In unaccented 
 u short : as in bri' 
 lun, &c. 
 
 syllables, the vowels are frequently sounded like 
 er, ri' ot, gal' Ion, pronounced bri' ur, ri' ut, gal'- 
 
26 
 
 THE PICTORIAL 
 
 SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 lad der 
 
 mel on 
 
 prim er 
 
 suf fer 
 
 lat ter 
 
 mem ber 
 
 rap id 
 
 sum mer 
 
 lem on 
 
 mer it 
 
 ren der 
 
 sum mit 
 
 let ter 
 
 mer ry 
 
 riv er 
 
 sup per 
 
 lim ber 
 
 mur der 
 
 sat in 
 
 tern per 
 
 lim it 
 
 nev er 
 
 sig nal 
 
 ten ant 
 
 liv ing 
 
 num ber 
 
 sin ful 
 
 ut ter 
 
 lum ber 
 
 pen man 
 
 sin ner 
 
 ut most 
 
 mad am 
 
 pep per 
 
 sis ter 
 
 vie tim 
 
 mat ter 
 
 pity 
 
 slum ber 
 
 vie tor 
 
 max im 
 
 print er 
 
 spir it 
 
 win ter 
 
 
 
 
 LESSC 
 
 IN VI. 
 
 has a fine 
 
 dog. 
 
 
 ^dfj^-ii 
 
 i 
 
 Frank 
 
 
 
 
 See him run and 
 
 play. 
 
 
 li' -^38 4kS*_^* 
 
 
 His dog's name is spot. 
 
 
 [JSb^SP'^ 
 
 JSJaSgl 
 
 He bai 
 
 rks, but wil 
 
 [ not bite. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 Easy words 
 
 of two syllables, accented 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 on the second. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 l 
 
 A base 
 
 as sume 
 
 con sume 
 
 de rive 
 
 a bate 
 
 at tire 
 
 con trive 
 
 de vice 
 
 a bode 
 
 be fore 
 
 de base 
 
 de vote 
 
 ad mire 
 
 be hind 
 
 de bate 
 
 di late 
 
 a dore 
 
 be hold 
 
 de cline 
 
 dis pute 
 
 ad vice 
 
 com pare 
 
 de fine 
 
 di vide 
 
 a like 
 
 com pile 
 
 de note 
 
 di vine 
 
 a live 
 
 con dole 
 
 de plore 
 
 en dure 
 
 a lone 
 
 con spire 
 
 de ride 
 
 en gage 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 27 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 im pute 
 in cite 
 in cline 
 in duce 
 in flame 
 in sane 
 in spire 
 in vade 
 in voke 
 mis take 
 pre pare 
 pro fane 
 
 2 
 
 as sist 
 at tend 
 at tract 
 be gun 
 be held 
 be reft 
 con sent 
 con sist 
 con suit 
 de feet 
 de pend 
 de tect 
 
 1 
 pro fuse 
 pro mote 
 pro voke 
 re cline 
 re duce 
 re gale 
 re late 
 re mind 
 re mote 
 re pine 
 re place 
 re ply 
 
 re port 
 re vile 
 re vive 
 re voke 
 sa lute 
 se cure 
 se date 
 sub lime 
 sup ply 
 sup port 
 un bind 
 un fold 
 
 un like 
 un safe 
 un told 
 up hold 
 
 2 
 
 ab rupt 
 ab surd 
 a dapt 
 ad just 
 af flict 
 al lot 
 an nul 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 Jane, it is time to get up. 
 Here is some corn and oats : 
 You must go and feed the hens. 
 Do you see that chick on the 
 old hen's back ? 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 de test 
 di gest 
 di rect 
 dis til 
 e mit 
 en act 
 en camp 
 en rich 
 e vent . 
 ex pend 
 fo ment 
 im pel 
 
 2 
 
 im print 
 in cur 
 in feet 
 in fest 
 in vent 
 in vest 
 oc cur 
 pre vent 
 pro test 
 re cant 
 re fleet 
 re fresh 
 
 2 
 
 re lax 
 re mit 
 ro bust 
 sub sist 
 sus pend 
 un bent 
 un curl 
 un fit 
 un furl 
 un hurt 
 un just 
 un man 
 
28 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION VII. 
 
 Easy words of three syllables, accented on the first. 
 
 But/ ter fly 
 
 An' te lope 
 
 'Buffalo 
 
 Croc' o dile 
 
 El' e phant 
 
 Pec' ca ry 
 
 Por' cu pine 
 
 King' iish er 
 
 Can' is ter 
 
 Can' die stick 
 
 Cof fee mill 
 
 Cof fee pot 
 
 Fry' ing pan 
 
 Gai' li pot 
 
 Musk' mel on 
 
 Pel' i can Cur' ry comb Par' a sol Kef tie drum 
 
 Pine' ap pie 
 
 Pep' per box 
 
 Pyr' a mid 
 
 Shoe' ham mer 
 
 Spec' ta c\es 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 29 
 
 De cen cy 
 
 de i ty 
 di a dem 
 di a lect 
 fu ner al 
 glo ri fy 
 li bra ry 
 no ti fy 
 o pi um 
 pa tri ot 
 pe ri od 
 pi e ty 
 
 LESSON II. 
 1 
 
 pi ra cy 
 po e try 
 pre mi um 
 pri ma ry 
 pri va cy 
 pu ri fy 
 pu ri ty 
 se ere cy 
 su i cide 
 va can cy 
 vi o late 
 vi o lent 
 
 ac ci dent 
 ad vo cate 
 am pu tate 
 an i mal 
 an nu al 
 ap pe tite 
 ar ro gant 
 at ti tude 
 cat cu late 
 cal i co 
 can di date 
 can ni bal 
 
 
 BpMIg' 
 
 lira 
 
 |||i§l)Oyrf 
 
 SSI 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 Here is a poor old man. 
 He has but one leg. 
 He has no hat on his head. 
 The man he met is kind. 
 He lives in a large house. 
 He will give him some food. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 can o py del e gate fac ul ty 
 
 cap i tal dep u ty fam i ly 
 
 cap ti vate des o late gen er al 
 
 cav al ry des ti tute grat i tude 
 
 eel e brate dif fi cult im i tate 
 
 cin na mon dig ni ty im pu dent 
 
 clem en cy el e gant in di cate 
 
 cul ti vate el e ment in di gent 
 
 cur ren cy em i grate in dus try 
 
 cus torn cr em u late in fan cy 
 
 dec o rate en mi ty in fan try 
 
j 
 
 30 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 
 2 2 
 
 2 
 
 in ter est neg li gent 
 
 suf fo cate 
 
 in ti mate pen e trate 
 
 sup pli cate 
 
 jus ti fy pen i tent 
 
 sur ro gate 
 
 lat i tude reg u lar 
 
 ten e ment 
 
 lib er ty reg u late 
 
 tes ta ment 
 
 mer ri ment sat is fy 
 
 trin i ty 
 
 min er al sen a tor 
 
 van i ty 
 
 min is try sen ti ment 
 
 ver i fy 
 
 mul ti tude stim u late 
 
 vin e gar 
 
 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 mes; he is a good 
 
 
 
 mm. 
 
 Here is Ja 
 
 
 itBitR"" 
 
 boy. His 
 
 aunt gave him a 
 
 
 ^^isfcl 
 
 new book. 
 
 
 
 
 He reads his book with care ; 
 
 
 
 and can spell all the hard 
 
 
 
 words in it. 
 
 
 He loves to read, and write 
 
 too. He means 
 
 to be a wise man. 
 
 
 [I. 
 
 SE 
 
 CTION VI 
 
 Easy words of three syllables , accented on the second. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 2 
 
 A bate ment il le gal 
 
 a ban don 
 
 al lure ment in duce ment 
 
 ac cus torn 
 
 a maze ment oc to ber 
 
 a mend ment 
 
 ar ri val po ma turn 
 
 ap par el 
 
 a tone ment re vi val 
 
 ap pen dix 
 
 com pi ler spec ta tor 
 
 as ses sor 
 
 con fine ment tes ta tor 
 
 as sis tant 
 
 ere a tor tes ta trix 
 
 be wil der 
 
 de co rum tri bu nal 
 
 col lee tor 
 
 j en gra ver un grate ful 
 
 con tern plate 
 
1 
 
 THE 
 
 PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 31 
 
 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 de can ter 
 
 fore tel ler 
 
 pa ren tal 
 
 de cern ber 
 
 in clem ent 
 
 re dun dant 
 
 de crep it 
 
 in cul cate 
 
 re fresh merit 
 
 de liv er 
 
 in cum bent 
 
 re mem ber 
 
 de vel op 
 
 in hab it 
 
 re plen ish 
 
 di min ish 
 
 in her it 
 
 sep tern ber 
 
 dis tern per 
 
 in sip id 
 
 sur ren der 
 
 em bel ish 
 
 in tes tate 
 
 to bac co 
 
 en cum ber 
 
 ma lig nant 
 
 um brel la 
 
 en ven om 
 
 no vem ber 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 un civ il 
 
 
 
 
 James, may 
 
 I take your top ? 
 
 
 &&// A - - ^ 
 
 
 
 life c 1 
 
 X 
 
 Yes, Charles, and I will show 
 
 
 W m$\. ^0 
 
 
 you how 
 
 to spin it. 
 
 
 tJLWifa® Jw 
 
 
 James has 
 
 been so kind, I 
 
 
 m^mU4^M 
 
 iB 
 
 will lend him my ball. 
 Here, James, will you have 
 
 w[^m^^Sr 
 
 
 P* **F taW^2^SK30"gj 
 
 
 my ball U 
 
 3 play with? 
 
 
 
 SI 
 
 
 :ction IX 
 
 Easy words of three syllables, accented on the third. 
 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 
 l 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 Dis com mode 
 
 o ver prize 
 
 dis af feet 
 
 im ma ture 
 
 o ver rate 
 
 dis an nul 
 
 in com plete 
 
 o ver take 
 
 dis re spect 
 
 in ter cede 
 
 per se vere 
 
 in cor rect 
 
 in ter line 
 
 re as sume 
 
 in di rect 
 
 in tro duce 
 
 re u nite 
 
 in ter rupt 
 
 lem on ade 
 
 su per fine 
 
 in ter sect 
 
 mis ap ply 
 
 su per sede 
 
 o ver turn 
 
 mis be have 
 
 i 
 
 un der go 
 
 re ad mit 
 
32 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION X. 
 
 Easy words of four syllables, accented on the first. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 2 2 
 
 ad mi ral ty 
 ar ro gant ly 
 del i ca cy 
 dif fi cul ty 
 em i nent ly 
 ep i lep sy 
 ev i dent ly 
 feb ru a ry 
 gen er al ly 
 ig no rant ly 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 Here is Miss Jane — she has 
 got a line new doll. May I 
 take your doll, Miss Jane ? 
 
 O yes, my dear Ann, you 
 may take it, and play with it. 
 
 Jane is a good girl, to let Ann 
 play with her new doll. 
 
 Ju di ca ture 
 lu mi na ry 
 mo men ta ry 
 nu mer al ly 
 nu mer a ry 
 nu mer a tor 
 vi o la tor 
 
 ac cu ra cy 
 ac cu rate ly 
 
 in ti ma cy 
 in tri ca cy 
 in tri cate ly 
 lit er al ly 
 lit er a ry 
 lit er a ture 
 mil i ta ry 
 min er al ist 
 prin ci pal ly 
 sec re ta ry 
 
 SECTION XL 
 
 Easy words of four syllables, accented on the second. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 1 1 
 
 cor po re al 
 ere du li ty 
 e lu ci date 
 en co mi um 
 
 Ac cu mu late 
 
 a e ri al 
 
 al le vi ate 
 
 an nu i ty 
 
 com mu ni cant fu tu ri ty 
 
 corn mu ni cate his to ri an 
 
 com mu ni ty im pi e ty 
 
 con nu bi al im pu ni ty 
 
 im pu n ty 
 li bra ri an 
 ma tu ri ty 
 me mo ri al 
 pro pri e ty 
 so bri e ty 
 so ci e ty 
 va ri e ty 
 
te^amat^TiTn-iHKffrSSi^i 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 33 
 
 ar tic u late 
 be nev o lent 
 cap tiv i ty 
 ce leb ri ty 
 ci vil i ty 
 con sid er ate 
 con spir a cy 
 de bil i ty 
 de cliv i ty 
 de prav i ty 
 di am e ter 
 di vin i ty 
 e pis co pal 
 e rad i cate 
 
 e vac u ate 
 ex trem i ty 
 fa tal i ty 
 fer til i ty 
 fi del i ty 
 for mal i ty 
 fru gal i ty 
 gen til i ty 
 hos til i ty 
 hu man i ty 
 hu mil i ty 
 i den ti ty 
 il lit er ate 
 im ped i ment 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 in fin i ty 
 in san i ty 
 in vig o rate 
 ir reg u !ar 
 mag nif i cent 
 me rid i an 
 mo ral i ty 
 mor tal i ty 
 ne ces si ty 
 om nip o tent 
 par tic u lar 
 po et i cal 
 po lit i cal 
 pos ter i ty 
 
 Jane, you may get the pail, 
 and go with me to milk the 
 cow. 
 
 The cow is in the pond ; 
 how will you get to her ? will 
 you have a boat ? 
 O no, she sees us, and will come to meet us 
 what a good cow she is ! 
 
 I 
 
 SECTION XII. 
 
 Easy words of four syllables, accented on the third 
 
 1 2 2 
 
 An te ce dent ben e fac tor in di rect ly 
 ap pa ra tus det ri men tal in stru men tal 
 dis in her it mal e fac tor 
 dis re spect ful mem o randum 
 fun da men tal mon u men tal 
 in de pen dent or na men tal 
 
 corn men tator 
 me di a tor 
 mod er a tor 
 sem i co Ion 
 
34 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOX. 
 
 SECTION XIV. 
 
 Easy lessons of one syllable, with pictures.* 
 
 The Sun. 
 
 Come here, Charles, and 
 look at the sun. It is in the 
 west. In a short time it will 
 set. We can look at the 
 sun now, for it is not so 
 bright as it was at noon. 
 See how fine the clouds are ! The sun goes 
 down quite fast. Now we can see but half of 
 it. The hills hide it from our view. 
 
 The Moon. 
 
 Now turn your face to the 
 east. What is it that shines 
 so bright ? It is the moon. 
 It is round and large. We 
 can look at the moon, for it is 
 not so bright as to hurt our 
 eyes. 
 
 The moon shines to give us light in the night, 
 when the sun is out of sight. 
 
 The Stars. 
 
 Now let us view the stars. 
 Those stars are large worlds: 
 but they are so far off that 
 they look quite small. We 
 must not stay out long in the 
 damp air; if we do, we shall 
 take cold, and be sick. 
 
 * Pictures are insened in many of the reading lessons, which ren- 
 der them not only instructive, but interesting and amusing to children. 
 They facilitate the acquisition of correct ideas, by addressing in- 
 struction to the eye, as well as the ear. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 35 
 
 HI 
 
 ?■) ;;f. 
 
 Ill 
 
 1BIH 
 
 i^Hllii! 
 
 School Boys. 
 
 Here are two good boys. 
 
 They are at school. They 
 
 can read, and spell, and 
 
 write : but this is not all ; 
 
 when they are at home, they 
 
 mind all that is said to them, 
 
 and do as they are bid. 
 
 They like to go to school, and learn, that 
 
 when they grow to be men, they may be wise 
 
 and good. 
 
 School Girls. 
 
 Do you see these two fine 
 girls? They can read, and 
 spell, and sew. When they 
 see folks that are poor, or 
 old, or lame, they do not 
 laugh at them, nor mock 
 
 them ; but they are kind, and glad when they 
 
 can help them, or do them good. 
 
 SECTION XV. 
 
 Words of one syllable. 
 
 The preceding spelling sections are composed of easy and familiar 
 words, in which the vowels have their long or short sound ; but in 
 this, and the following sections, the words are of more difficult or- 
 thography and pronunciation, including those which contain silent 
 letters. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 Babe 
 
 bait 
 
 baize 
 
 bead 
 
 beam 
 
 beast 
 
 beef 
 
 bleach 
 
 bleed 
 
 blow 
 
 1 
 boat 
 brain 
 brief 
 bright 
 brine 
 
 l 
 chair 
 cheap 
 cheek 
 cheese 
 claim 
 
36 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 l 
 
 l 
 
 l 
 
 clean 
 
 gAost 
 
 own 
 
 slain 
 
 swain * 
 
 cloak 
 
 gleam 
 
 paint 
 
 sleep 
 
 swale 
 
 coach 
 
 glow 
 
 pay 
 
 sleeve 
 
 sweet 
 
 comft 
 
 goat 
 
 pea 
 
 smear 
 
 tea 
 
 cream 
 
 gowrd 
 
 peach 
 
 snail 
 
 teach 
 
 crow 
 
 grain 
 
 play 
 
 sneak 
 
 tease 
 
 day 
 
 green 
 
 plea 
 
 sneer 
 
 tight 
 
 deem 
 
 grow 
 
 plead 
 
 sneeze 
 
 toad 
 
 deep 
 
 heat 
 
 preach 
 
 snore 
 
 toast 
 
 door 
 
 hoarse 
 
 priest 
 
 snow 
 
 train 
 
 drake 
 
 juice 
 
 prose 
 
 soap 
 
 trait 
 
 dream 
 
 keep 
 
 quite 
 
 source 
 
 treat 
 
 each 
 
 knee 
 
 reach 
 
 speak 
 
 tree 
 
 ear 
 
 knife 
 
 ream 
 
 spear 
 
 trace 
 
 east 
 
 lay 
 
 reap 
 
 speech 
 
 vagwe 
 
 eat 
 
 league 
 
 rear 
 
 speed 
 
 veal 
 
 feast 
 
 lean 
 
 roam 
 
 spleen 
 
 vogwe 
 
 feed 
 
 least 
 
 roar 
 
 sport 
 
 weave 
 
 feel 
 
 light 
 
 roast 
 
 spray 
 
 weed 
 
 field 
 
 loaf 
 
 rogue 
 
 square 
 
 weep 
 
 fiend 
 
 may 
 
 saint 
 
 squeal 
 
 wise 
 
 fight 
 
 meal 
 
 screak 
 
 stain 
 
 year 
 
 flail 
 
 meek 
 
 screen 
 
 stays 
 
 zeal 
 
 fleece 
 
 nail 
 
 scroll 
 
 steam 
 
 2 
 
 fiight 
 
 near 
 
 seat 
 
 steed 
 
 back 
 
 floor 
 
 neat 
 
 seed 
 
 steer 
 
 bilge 
 
 flow 
 
 niece 
 
 sheaf 
 
 strain 
 
 black 
 
 frail 
 
 nigh 
 
 sheep 
 
 strange 
 
 bless 
 
 free 
 
 oak 
 
 shield 
 
 stray 
 
 bliss 
 
 fri^-At 
 
 oats 
 
 show 
 
 stream 
 
 brick 
 
 gain 
 
 ode 
 
 shrine 
 
 street 
 
 buck 
 
 gawge 
 
 old 
 
 siege 
 
 stroll 
 
 bmld 
 
 j 
 

 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 37 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 bulge 
 
 helve 
 
 pence 
 
 sill 
 
 swerve 
 
 buzz 
 
 hence 
 
 perch 
 
 singe 
 
 swi/ch 
 
 chess 
 
 herb 
 
 phlegm 
 
 sketch 
 
 tack 
 
 church 
 
 hill 
 
 pifch 
 
 skiff 
 
 teint 
 
 crack 
 
 hinge 
 
 plaid 
 
 slack 
 
 tell 
 
 cringe 
 
 hiss 
 
 plump 
 
 sling 
 
 tempt 
 
 curse 
 
 hull 
 
 prince 
 
 sna/ch 
 
 tense 
 
 curve 
 
 kick 
 
 prism 
 
 snuff 
 
 term 
 
 dead 
 
 kiss 
 
 puff 
 
 spasm 
 
 tick 
 
 de&t 
 
 lack 
 
 pulse 
 
 speck 
 
 tinge 
 
 deck 
 
 lapse 
 
 purr 
 
 spell 
 
 touch 
 
 dense 
 
 la/ch 
 
 purse 
 
 spill 
 
 tough 
 
 duck 
 
 learn 
 
 quack 
 
 spread 
 
 tread 
 
 dum& 
 
 less 
 
 quick 
 
 spring 
 
 truss 
 
 dunce 
 
 luck 
 
 quill 
 
 squint 
 
 tuft 
 
 dwell 
 
 lull 
 
 quince 
 
 stack 
 
 twin 
 
 earn 
 
 lungs 
 
 realm 
 
 stag 
 
 twinge 
 
 e gg 
 
 ma/ch 
 
 rick 
 
 stead 
 
 urge 
 
 elm 
 
 mess 
 
 rill 
 
 stern 
 
 vent 
 
 fell 
 
 midst 
 
 rinse 
 
 stick 
 
 verb 
 
 fence 
 
 mill 
 
 schism 
 
 stiff 
 
 verse 
 
 flash 
 
 miss 
 
 scourge 
 
 stilts 
 
 well 
 
 flint 
 
 muff 
 
 scratch 
 
 sti/ch 
 
 wick 
 
 fn'end 
 
 "neck 
 
 sculk 
 
 stress 
 
 will 
 
 fringe 
 
 nerve 
 
 scull 
 
 stretch 
 
 wren 
 
 glimpse 
 
 numft 
 
 serve 
 
 struck 
 
 wrist 
 
 gnash 
 
 nurse 
 
 shall 
 
 stub 
 
 writ 
 
 gnat 
 
 nymph 
 
 shell 
 
 stud 
 
 yerk 
 
 g?/ess 
 
 pack 
 
 shrill 
 
 stuff 
 
 young 
 
 tiack 
 
 pa/ch 
 
 shrub 
 
 such 
 
 3 
 
 ha/ch 
 
 pearl 
 
 sick 
 
 suds 
 
 bought 
 
 have 
 
 peck 
 
 sieve 
 
 sweat 
 
 brawl 
 
38 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 brought 
 
 3 
 
 short 
 
 4 
 
 hark 
 
 5 
 
 loll 
 
 5 
 
 wand 
 
 caught 
 
 small 
 
 harm 
 
 long 
 
 wash 
 
 caw 
 
 sought 
 
 lard 
 
 mock 
 
 wa/ch 
 
 cha/k 
 
 squall 
 
 lark 
 
 mosqwe 
 
 wrong 
 
 claw 
 
 sta/k 
 
 ^gh 
 
 nofch 
 
 g 
 
 corn 
 
 stall 
 
 mark 
 
 plod 
 
 bloom 
 
 corpse 
 
 stork 
 
 parse 
 
 plot 
 
 boom 
 
 dawn 
 
 storm 
 
 psalm 
 
 pomp 
 
 boon 
 
 dwarf 
 
 straw 
 
 scar 
 
 pond 
 
 boot 
 
 fall 
 
 tall 
 
 shark 
 
 prompt 
 
 brood 
 
 false 
 
 taught 
 
 sharp 
 
 prong 
 
 broom 
 
 fault 
 
 torch 
 
 snarl 
 
 prop 
 
 cool 
 
 fork 
 
 vault 
 
 spark 
 
 rock 
 
 coop 
 
 fot^At 
 
 war 
 
 starch 
 
 romp 
 
 doom 
 
 fraud 
 
 warm 
 
 starve 
 
 shop 
 
 droop 
 
 gauze 
 
 warn 
 
 yard 
 
 shot 
 
 food 
 
 gnaw 
 
 wrought 
 
 5 
 
 slop 
 
 fool 
 
 haw 
 
 4 
 
 block 
 
 sock 
 
 gloom 
 
 hawk 
 
 arms 
 
 blo/ch 
 
 solve 
 
 goose 
 
 groom 
 
 groove 
 
 horn 
 
 bard 
 
 bond 
 
 song 
 
 horse 
 
 barge 
 
 bo/ch 
 
 spot 
 
 law 
 
 barn 
 
 chop 
 
 squab 
 
 growp 
 
 lord 
 
 ca/f 
 
 clock 
 
 squash 
 
 hoof 
 
 morn 
 
 carve 
 
 crock 
 
 squat 
 
 hoot 
 
 paw 
 
 charge 
 
 dock 
 
 stock 
 
 loon 
 
 pawn 
 
 charm 
 
 doll 
 
 strong 
 
 loop 
 
 quart 
 
 dark 
 
 drop 
 
 swab 
 
 loose 
 
 salt 
 
 dart 
 
 flock 
 
 swamp 
 
 lose 
 
 sauce 
 
 farce 
 
 flop 
 
 swop 
 
 mood 
 
 saw 
 
 farm 
 
 fond 
 
 tongs 
 
 moon 
 
 scald 
 
 ha/f 
 
 frock 
 
 trot 
 
 moor 
 
 scorn 
 U= 
 
 hard 
 
 from 
 
 wan 
 
 moose 
 
.... 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 39 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 oi 
 
 on 
 
 noon 
 
 troop 
 
 bird 
 
 choice 
 
 pound 
 
 pool 
 
 who 
 
 blood 
 
 coin 
 
 proud 
 
 poor 
 
 whom 
 
 come 
 
 join 
 
 round 
 
 proof 
 
 whoop 
 
 dirt 
 
 joint 
 
 trout 
 
 prove 
 
 whose 
 
 first 
 
 voice 
 
 ow 
 
 rood 
 
 7 
 
 flood 
 
 oy 
 
 brow 
 
 roof 
 
 bush 
 
 glove 
 
 cloy 
 
 brown 
 
 room 
 
 cowld 
 
 her 
 
 j°y 
 
 clown 
 
 scoop 
 
 foot 
 
 love 
 
 on 
 
 cow 
 
 shoot 
 
 full 
 
 word 
 
 bound 
 
 crowd 
 
 sloop 
 
 good 
 
 world 
 
 cloud 
 
 crown 
 
 soon 
 
 goods 
 
 worm 
 
 count 
 
 down 
 
 so?*p 
 
 pull 
 
 9 
 
 dou&t 
 
 drown 
 
 spool 
 
 push 
 
 freight 
 
 ground 
 
 how- 
 
 spoon 
 
 puss 
 
 skein 
 
 house 
 
 mow 
 
 stool 
 
 should 
 
 10 
 
 louse 
 
 now 
 
 stoop 
 
 stood 
 
 piqwe 
 
 mouse 
 
 town 
 
 tom6 
 
 wool 
 
 shire 
 
 ounce 
 
 vow 
 
 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 
 Words 
 
 in which th has its sharp sound ; as 
 
 in Oiin. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 Both 
 
 breadth 
 
 strength 
 
 north 
 
 throng 
 
 faith 
 
 breath 
 
 theft 
 
 swath 
 
 6 
 
 growth 
 
 death 
 
 thick 
 
 thaw 
 
 tooth 
 
 oath 
 
 depth 
 
 thin 
 
 thorn 
 
 8 
 
 sheath 
 
 earth 
 
 thing 
 
 thought 
 
 doth 
 
 teeth 
 
 filth 
 
 thread 
 
 thrall 
 
 month 
 
 theme 
 
 hath 
 
 threat 
 
 thwart 
 
 thirst 
 
 thief 
 
 health 
 
 thum& 
 
 warmth 
 
 worth 
 
 thrive 
 
 length 
 
 thump 
 
 5 
 
 011 
 
 throat 
 
 pith 
 
 wealth 
 
 thong 
 
 south 
 
 throw 
 
 smith 
 
 width 
 
 throb 
 
 mouth 
 
40 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Words in which th has its flat sound ; as in them. 
 
 Breathe 
 
 clothe 
 
 lathe 
 
 loathe 
 
 seeth 
 
 1 
 
 swathe 
 these 
 thine 
 those 
 though 
 
 1 
 
 thy 
 tithe 
 
 2 
 
 them 
 
 then 
 
 thence 
 
 this 
 
 thus 
 
 6 
 
 booth 
 
 smooth 
 
 sooth 
 
 9 
 
 they 
 
 2 
 
 than 
 that 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 In the remaining part of this section, and part of the spell 
 ing sections which follow, two or more words have the same, 
 or a similar meaning ; (being part of the index of Crabb 1 s 
 Synonymes ; ) and are placed opposite each other in such a 
 manner that the second column defines the first, and the first 
 defines the second. Some words have more than one mean- 
 ing ; in such cases the primary sense only, is given. [For 
 equivocal words with different meanings, see page 165.] 
 
 Teachers who are opposed to defining one word by another 
 single word, can use these, the same as other lessons, for spell- 
 ing only. 
 
 1 
 
 Coast 
 cold 
 deed 
 dough 
 drive 
 flame 
 fold 
 ford 
 gaze 
 globe 
 grief 
 grieve 
 heal 
 heap 
 heed 
 lade 
 main 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 a 
 a 
 to 
 to 
 
 to 
 to 
 a 
 to 
 to 
 
 shore 
 
 bleak 
 
 feat 
 
 paste 
 
 force 
 
 blaze 
 
 plait 
 
 wade 
 
 stare 
 
 sphere 
 
 woe 
 
 mowrn 
 
 cure 
 
 pile 
 
 mind 
 
 load 
 
 chief 
 
 moan 
 
 quote 
 
 race 
 
 rise 
 
 row 
 
 scold 
 
 shake 
 
 shriek 
 
 sight 
 
 slide 
 
 smoke 
 
 soak 
 
 wait 
 
 smite 
 
 streak 
 
 sway 
 
 trade 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 to 
 to 
 a 
 to 
 to 
 
 l 
 
 wail 
 cite 
 tribe 
 soar 
 tier 
 chide 
 quake 
 screech 
 view 
 glide 
 fume 
 steep 
 stay 
 strike 
 stripe 
 wield 
 deal 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 THE PICTORIAL 
 
 SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 41 
 
 1 
 yield 
 1 
 
 to 
 
 l 
 cede 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 ( rate 
 ^ toll 
 
 a 
 
 2 
 
 tax 
 
 azd 
 
 to 
 
 help 
 
 rave 
 
 to 
 
 rant 
 
 beak 
 bite 
 
 a 
 to 
 
 bill 
 &nap 
 
 right 
 scream 
 
 to 
 
 just 
 
 yell 
 
 burn 
 
 bloat 
 
 to 
 
 swell 
 
 sear 
 
 to 
 
 boast 
 
 to 
 
 brag 
 
 seek 
 
 to 
 
 search 
 
 brake 
 
 a 
 
 fern 
 
 sezze 
 
 to 
 
 cafch 
 
 breach 
 
 a 
 
 gap 
 
 shear 
 
 to 
 
 clip 
 
 change 
 
 to 
 
 turn 
 
 size 
 
 _ 
 
 bulk 
 
 cheat 
 
 to 
 
 trick 
 
 slat/ 
 
 to 
 
 kill 
 
 cleave 
 
 to 
 
 split 
 
 slow 
 
 _ 
 
 dull 
 
 close 
 
 to 
 
 shut 
 
 
 
 
 close 
 
 
 
 squeeze 
 
 to 
 
 press 
 
 ■ 
 
 snug 
 
 steal 
 
 to 
 
 filch 
 
 crime 
 
 - 
 
 gwilt 
 
 strike 
 
 to 
 
 rap 
 
 dive 
 dupe 
 
 to 
 to 
 
 plunge 
 gull 
 
 sweep 
 tease 
 
 to 
 to 
 
 brush 
 vex 
 
 ease 
 
 - 
 
 rest 
 
 torn 
 
 was 
 
 rent 
 
 fear 
 
 - 
 
 dread 
 
 veer 
 
 to 
 
 turn 
 
 float 
 
 to 
 
 swim 
 
 wage 
 
 to 
 
 bet 
 
 gripe 
 hide 
 
 to 
 a 
 
 pinch 
 skin 
 
 wipe 
 i 
 
 to 
 
 rub 
 
 3 
 
 horde 
 
 a 
 
 clan 
 
 bile 
 
 _ 
 
 gall 
 
 joke 
 
 a 
 
 jest 
 
 boat 
 
 a 
 
 yawl 
 
 leap 
 
 to 
 
 jump 
 
 creep 
 
 to 
 
 crawl 
 
 lease 
 
 to 
 
 rent 
 
 lame 
 
 . 
 
 halt 
 
 leave 
 
 to 
 
 quit 
 
 name 
 
 to 
 
 call 
 
 loan 
 
 to 
 
 lend 
 
 need 
 
 — 
 
 want 
 
 mild 
 
 - 
 
 bland 
 
 price 
 
 - 
 
 cost 
 
 peace 
 
 - 
 
 rest 
 
 shape 
 
 a 
 
 form 
 
 plagae 
 
 a 
 
 pest 
 
 speak 
 
 to 
 
 ta/k 
 
 plight 
 
 a 
 
 pledge 
 
 wide 
 
 „ 
 
 broad 
 
 poll 
 
 the 
 
 head 
 
 l 
 
 
 4 
 
 prate 
 
 to 
 
 chat 
 
 blight 
 
 to 
 
 blast 
 
42 THE PICTORIAL 
 
 SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 1 4 
 
 2 2 
 
 crave to ask 
 
 melt to smelt 
 
 great - large 
 
 mince to hash 
 
 piece a part 
 
 sell to vend 
 
 rind - bark 
 
 smell - sent 
 
 1 5 
 
 skill - &nack 
 
 cease to stop 
 
 sup to sip 
 tusk a fang 
 twig a sprig 
 verge a brink 
 
 queer - odd 
 
 sigh to sob 
 
 swine a hog 
 
 1 6 
 
 court to woo 
 faint to swoon 
 
 1 ou 
 
 wa.y a route 
 
 2 2 
 
 bad - ill 
 
 2 4 
 
 big - large 
 dress a garb 
 
 fling to cast 
 
 rough - harsh 
 
 still - ca/m 
 
 belt a sash 
 
 2 5 
 
 cleanse /o purge 
 curb to check 
 
 blur a blot 
 mist a fog 
 
 2 2 
 
 rap to &nock 
 
 dull - blunt 
 
 turf a sod 
 
 Questions upon the 
 
 j preceding section. 
 
 Teachers should frequently ex 
 
 ercise their pupils in answenng 
 
 questions upon the sounds of the 1< 
 
 3tters, until they acquire a correct 
 
 knowledge of the use of the table r 
 
 epresenting the different sounds o( 
 
 the vowels. 
 
 
 What sound has a in babe ? 
 
 What sound has o in corn? 
 
 What sound has e in beam ! 
 
 What sound has a in calf? 
 
 What letter is silent in beam ? 
 
 Which letter is silent] 
 
 What sound has i in wise ? 
 
 What sound has a in wan? 
 
 What sound has s in wise ? 
 
 What sound has o in move ? 
 
 Why do you sound it like z ? 
 
 What sound has oo in foot ? 
 
 What sound has o in blow ? 
 
 What sound has u in bush ? 
 
 Which letter is silent 1 
 
 What sound has i in bird? 
 
 What s^und has a in back? 
 
 What sound has o in come ? 
 
 What sound has u in dunce ? 
 
 What sound has e in they? 
 
 What sound has c in dunce ? 
 
 What sound has i in shire ? 
 
 Which letter is silent? 
 
 What sound has gh in laugh? 
 
 What sound has i m hill ? 
 
 What sound has th in both ? 
 
 What sound has a mfall? 
 
 What sound has th in these ? 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 43 
 
 SECTION XVI. 
 
 Easy reading lessons of one syllable. 
 
 The Bear. 
 
 Come here, Frank, and tell 
 me what beast this is. It is 
 a bear. Some bears are 
 black ; but far to the north, 
 where it is cold, they are 
 white. They have large 
 
 teeth, and sharp claws ; and are strong and fierce. 
 Bears live in the woods, and in dens. They 
 
 eat roots, nuts, corn and flesh. Some folks 
 
 make use of their flesh for food. 
 
 The Swan. 
 
 We next come to the 
 
 swan ; which is a large fowl 
 
 of the goose kind. It has a 
 
 long neck, short legs, and is 
 
 as white as snow. Its food is 
 
 the same as that of the goose. 
 
 Swans make their nests of sticks and grass. 
 
 Their eggs are white and large ; and they hatch 
 
 them in two months. The young swans are gray. 
 
 The Owl. 
 
 Look here, Charles, see 
 
 this owl ! He has a mouse 
 
 in his bill. Owls eat mice, 
 
 and small birds. They do 
 
 ^ not fly much by day, they see 
 
 tammOim best in the night. 
 Owls are large birds, and live in the woods. 
 They have large eyes, and a head like a cat. 
 
44 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Familiar Lessons in words of one syllable. 
 
 Charles, where does the rain come from? 
 Rain comes from the clouds. If it did not rain, 
 wheat, and rye, and corn would not grow ; and 
 then we should have no bread. 
 
 If it did not rain, the grass would not grow, 
 and the cows would give us no milk. Cows eat 
 grass, and that makes them give milk. 
 
 Let us take a walk in the fields, and see the 
 cows and calves, the sheep and lambs, the birds 
 and trees. 
 
 Do not walk on the grass ; it is high, and quite 
 wet. Walk in this smooth path. 
 
 Here is a field of wheat. It will soon be ripe. 
 Flour is made of wheat. Bread is made of flour. 
 
 What time of day is it? It is noon. Where 
 is the sun at noon ? In the south. Turn your 
 face, and look at it. 
 
 When it is noon, and you look at the sun, 
 your face is to the south, your back to the north, 
 your left hand to the east, and your right hand 
 to the west. 
 
 Where does the sunrise? In the east. Where 
 does it set? In the west. Far to the north it is 
 cold ; but to the south it is warm. 
 
 The wind blows. Which way does it blow ? 
 It blows from the north. The north wind is cold ; 
 the south wind is warm : the east wind will bring 
 a storm of rain. 
 
 Charles, what were eyes made for ? To see 
 with ; ears to hear with ; the tongue to talk with ; 
 the nose to smell with, and legs to walk with. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 45 
 
 SECTION XVII. 
 
 Words of two syllables, accented on the first. 
 
 A corn 
 a gent 
 a pril 
 bane fill 
 bea ver 
 beau ty 
 be som 
 bible 
 bold ness 
 by word 
 ca dence 
 clear ness 
 coz/rt ship 
 dai ly 
 
 dai ry 
 daz sy 
 de ism 
 de ist 
 dole fill 
 drea ry 
 ea gle 
 ea sy 
 e qual 
 fa ble 
 fa mous 
 fra grant 
 fri day 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 1 
 
 grace ful 
 great ness 
 gnev ous 
 hind most 
 hy men 
 le gion 
 li cense 
 light ning 
 like wise 
 lone some 
 mi ser 
 mo tion* 
 mo tive 
 mourn er 
 
 na tion 
 na tive 
 nee die 
 nee dy 
 no ble 
 no tice 
 no tion 
 nui sance 
 pain ful 
 pa rent 
 pave ment 
 pay ment 
 peace ful 
 
 pew ter 
 pi ous 
 poul tice 
 poul try 
 preach er 
 pro noun 
 yr{ ment 
 re gion 
 re tail 
 safe ty 
 sai lor 
 sci ence 
 se quel 
 showl der 
 
 si lence 
 si lent 
 sta ble 
 sta tion 
 stee pie 
 stew ard 
 ta ble 
 teach er 
 trai tor 
 treat ment 
 trea ty 
 tri umph 
 tues day 
 
 wea ry 
 wri ter 
 
 2 
 
 ab sence 
 ac tion 
 ac tive 
 ad verb 
 am bush 
 an nals 
 an swer 
 ar row 
 bap tism 
 bash ful 
 bat tie 
 
 bel low 
 bis cmt 
 bish op 
 blem ish 
 break fast 
 brit tie 
 bzald ing 
 bun die 
 can die 
 cap tain 
 cap tive 
 cat tie 
 cher ry 
 
 * The syllables tion, and sion, are pronounced like shun, through- 
 out the work, unless otherwise denned. 
 
46 
 
 THE PICTORIAL 
 
 SPELLING-BOOK 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 cred it 
 
 hem lock 
 
 quin sy 
 
 vil lain 
 
 crip pie 
 
 her aid 
 
 read y 
 
 weap on 
 
 crum ble 
 
 hus band 
 
 rel ish 
 
 wed ding 
 
 cur tain 
 
 ill ness 
 
 rep tile 
 
 wednes day 
 
 dam sel 
 
 im pulse 
 
 rid die 
 
 wel come 
 
 daz zle 
 
 in come 
 
 ruffle 
 
 wil low 
 
 debt or 
 
 in sect 
 
 sa/m on 
 
 win dow 
 
 del uge 
 
 in ward 
 
 scan dal 
 
 wish ful 
 
 die tion 
 
 jour nal 
 
 scis SOYS 
 
 yel low 
 
 dim pie 
 
 jus tice 
 
 sec ond 
 
 zeal ous 
 
 dis tance 
 
 kin dred 
 
 sec tion 
 
 3 
 
 dis trict 
 
 king dom 
 
 self ish 
 
 al ways 
 
 dwel ling 
 
 land lord 
 
 sen ate 
 
 auc tion 
 
 ef fort 
 
 lit tie 
 
 sen tence 
 
 au tu nm 
 
 el bow 
 
 mal ice 
 
 shad ow 
 
 aw ful 
 
 em pire 
 
 man sion 
 
 shep Aerd 
 
 bor der 
 
 en trance 
 
 mead ow 
 
 shil ling 
 
 cau tion 
 
 es sence 
 
 mel low 
 
 sim pie 
 
 daug-A ter 
 
 fain ine 
 
 men tion 
 
 snuf fers 
 
 false hood 
 
 fid die 
 
 mid mght 
 
 spar row; 
 
 for feit 
 
 tig ure 
 
 mus lin 
 
 stum ble 
 
 for mer 
 
 fin ish 
 
 nar vow 
 
 sun day 
 
 hor net 
 
 frac tion 
 
 nim ble 
 
 syn tax 
 
 law yer 
 
 fnend ship 
 
 nut meg 
 
 sys tern 
 
 mor tal 
 
 fur row 
 
 par ish 
 
 tal low 
 
 mor tise 
 
 gen tie 
 
 pen sion 
 
 tav ern 
 
 or chard 
 
 grum ble 
 
 per ish 
 
 tern pest 
 
 or phan 
 
 gum ea 
 
 pil grim 
 
 tern pie 
 
 quar ter 
 
 han die 
 
 pleas ant 
 
 tim ber 
 
 scorn ful 
 
 har row 
 
 pres ence 
 
 tres pass 
 
 war ble 
 
 heav y 
 
 pub lish 
 
 turn pike 
 
 4 
 
 heif er 
 
 pun ish 
 
 up rig At 
 
 ar gue 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 47 
 
 bar gain 
 bar ter 
 car nal 
 char coal 
 far mer 
 gar ment 
 har ness 
 har vest 
 lawgh ter 
 mar gin 
 part ner 
 par ty 
 tar nish 
 var nish 
 
 5 
 
 bios som 
 bor row 
 bot torn 
 cod fish 
 cof fee 
 coffin 
 col umn 
 com ma 
 com merce 
 com mon 
 
 5 
 
 con sul 
 con text 
 cop per 
 doc tor 
 doc trine 
 dol lar 
 fol low 
 folly 
 for est 
 gos pel 
 Xon est 
 hos tile 
 mod ern 
 mor al 
 mor row 
 non sense 
 nos tril 
 nos trum 
 nov ice 
 of fice 
 pom pous 
 pot ash 
 prob lem 
 prop er 
 pros pect 
 
 prov mce 
 sol emn 
 sol id 
 sor row 
 swal ]ow 
 tor rent 
 war rant 
 
 6 
 
 bo som 
 move ment 
 spoon ful 
 
 7 
 
 bul lock 
 ful ness 
 pud ding 
 pul pit 
 worn an 
 
 8 
 
 com fort 
 com pass 
 cov er 
 gov ern 
 love ly 
 lov er 
 mon day 
 
 8 
 
 ov en 
 wor ship 
 
 oy 
 
 boy ish 
 joy ful 
 loy al 
 roy al 
 voy age 
 
 on 
 
 boun ty 
 coun ty 
 doufet ful 
 moun tain 
 out rage 
 
 ow 
 
 bow er 
 cow ard 
 dow er 
 dow ry 
 drow sy 
 pow der 
 pow er 
 show er 
 tow er 
 town ship 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 The words in the remaining part of this section, are synony- 
 mous ; in which the second column defines the first, and the 
 first the second. 
 
 Bale ful 
 ho ly 
 fu tile 
 i ris 
 
 l 
 
 the 
 
 wo ful 
 sa cred 
 use less 
 rain bow 
 
 2 
 
 la den 
 pe tre 
 pri vate 
 pu pil 
 
 load ed 
 ni tre 
 se cret 
 stu dent 
 
48 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 to 
 a 
 to 
 a 
 
 sole ly 
 
 weak ly 
 1 
 
 an gel 
 bee tie 
 care less 
 dan ger 
 e ven 
 fa tal 
 fear ful 
 has* en 
 jo ker 
 li brate 
 like ness 
 load stone a 
 mean ing - 
 mou\ dy - 
 
 pee vish 
 
 peo pie 
 
 pli ant 
 
 pre cept a 
 qui et 
 rare ly 
 ro mance a 
 shi ning - 
 show y 
 stu pid 
 to ken 
 to per 
 tu mult 
 ty rant 
 
 1 
 mere ly 
 fee ble 
 
 2 
 
 cher ub 
 mal let 
 reck less 
 per il 
 lev el 
 dead ly 
 tim id 
 hur ry 
 jest er 
 bal ance 
 sem blance 
 mag net 
 pur port 
 mus ty 
 
 tes ty ) 
 fret ful \ 
 per sons 
 flex ile ) 
 sup pie \ 
 les son 
 tran quil 
 sel dom 
 fie tion 
 ful gent 
 splen did 
 dump ish 
 symp torn 
 drunk ard 
 bus t\e 
 des pot 
 
 l 
 pri or 
 fre quent 
 
 l 
 great er 
 la ding 
 
 l 
 sci ence 
 re cent 
 
 2 
 
 bab ble 
 
 bal lot 
 cen tre 
 clat ter 
 em blem 
 er rand 
 flick er 
 
 fash ion 
 glit ter 
 ham let 
 in jure 
 in stant 
 jab ber 
 jun to 
 lug gage 
 mat ter 
 mel ter 
 mut ter 
 nour ish 
 pes ter 
 pil lage 
 prac tice 
 rel ict 
 
 3 
 
 - for mer 
 
 - oft en 
 
 4 
 
 - lar ger 
 
 - car go 
 
 5 
 
 - know\ edge 
 
 - mod ern 
 
 2 
 
 to gab ble ) 
 
 to prat tie £ 
 
 a tick et 
 
 the mid die 
 
 to rat tie 
 
 a sym bol 
 
 a mes sage 
 
 to flut ter 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 hab it 
 glisf en 
 vil lage 
 dam age 
 mo ment 
 chat ter 
 fac tion 
 bag gage 
 sub stance 
 smel ter 
 mum ble 
 cher ish 
 troub le 
 plun der 
 cus torn 
 wid ow 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 49 
 
 rub bish 
 
 - 
 
 fragments 
 
 rud dy 
 
 - 
 
 red dish 
 
 shac kle 
 
 to 
 
 fet ter 
 
 sin ew 
 
 a 
 
 ten don 
 
 spec tre 
 
 a 
 
 phan torn 
 
 stut ter 
 
 to 
 
 stam mer 
 
 tarn per 
 
 to 
 
 med die 
 
 trav el 
 
 a 
 
 jour ney 
 
 tun nel 
 
 a 
 
 fun nel 
 
 wed lock 
 
 - 
 
 mar riage 
 
 2 
 
 chap let 
 
 a 
 
 4 
 
 gar land 
 
 cun ning 
 
 - 
 
 craft y 
 
 skil ful 
 
 - 
 
 art ful 
 
 sul ly 
 
 to 
 
 tar nish 
 
 2 
 
 ad age 
 
 a 
 
 5 
 
 prov erb 
 
 brig and 
 
 a 
 
 rob ber 
 
 bur nish 
 
 to 
 
 pol ish 
 
 cav ern 
 
 a 
 
 grot to 
 
 dan dy 
 
 a 
 
 cox comb 
 
 dusk y 
 
 - 
 
 som bre 
 
 -flour ish 
 
 to 
 
 pros per 
 
 lus ty 
 
 - 
 
 stock y 
 
 man ners 
 
 . 
 
 mor als 
 
 to 
 to 
 to 
 
 a 
 to 
 
 2 
 
 ram b\e 
 tat tie 
 wel ter 
 
 2 
 
 dis mal 
 silly 
 
 2 
 
 bat tie 
 shel ter 
 
 2 
 
 ven om 
 
 2 
 
 ras cal 
 
 2 
 
 das tard 
 
 3 
 
 gau dy - 
 
 3 
 
 slau^A ter - 
 bor der a 
 
 4 
 
 mar vel to 
 
 a 
 
 con flict 
 of fer 
 
 a 
 to 
 
 bios som a 
 
 wan der 
 gos sip 
 wal low 
 
 6 
 
 gloom y 
 fool ish 
 
 8 
 
 com bat 
 cov er 
 
 oi 
 
 poi son 
 
 ou 
 
 scoun drel 
 
 ow 
 
 cow ard 
 
 3 
 
 taw dry 
 
 4 
 
 car nage 
 mar gin 
 
 8 
 
 won der 
 
 5 
 
 con test 
 prof fer 
 
 ow 
 
 flow er 
 
 Questions upon the 
 What sound has a in a-corn ? 
 By what figure is it governed 7 
 What letter is silent in dai-ly ? 
 How are the silent letters printed 1 
 What sound has e in cred-it 1 
 What figure governs it ] 
 What sound has y in syn-tax 1 
 What figure governs it 1 
 What sound has a in wa-ter 1 
 What figure governs it? 
 
 preceding section. 
 What sound has a in far-mer? 
 By what figure is it governed ? 
 What sound has o in nov-el 1 
 By what figure is it governed ? 
 What sound has oo in fool-ish ? 
 By what figure is it governed ? 
 What sound has o in cov-er ? 
 What figure governs it ? 
 What letter is silent in hon-est ? 
 What sound has s in drowsy ? 
 
50 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION XVIII. 
 
 Easy and instructive Reading Lessons. 
 
 Here is the picture of some school-boys : 
 four of them are standing up to spell, three 
 more are coming to spell with them, and three 
 others, who have just been punished for their 
 bad conduct, are going to their seats; count 
 them, and tell how many there are in all. 
 
 One, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten. 
 
 You must now learn the figures that represent 
 these numbers. Here is the picture of some 
 apples, with figures placed under them. By 
 counting the apples, you will know the figures. 
 You must count them as you did the school- 
 boys. Now learn the figures by counting the 
 apples. 
 
 fa jjl fjlfll 
 
 12 345 6789 10 
 
 Can you tell what use is made of apples ? 
 Apples are a very valuable fruit ; and are used 
 in various ways. When they are ripe, they are 
 fit to eat. Some are made into sauce, pies, 
 and puddings : many of them are used for 
 making cider. 
 
 There are various kinds of apples ; some are 
 red, some are green, and others yellow : some 
 are sweet, and some sour. The tree on which 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 51 
 
 they grow, is called an apple-tree, Here is a 
 picture of it. 
 
 By looking at this pic- 
 ture, you will perceive that 
 the apple-tree consists of 
 roots, trunk, branches, 
 leaves and fruit. 
 
 The roots are the parts 
 which grow in the ground, 
 and support the tree. The 
 part between the branches and the ground is 
 called the trunk, or body. The branches are 
 those parts which shoot out from the trunk, 
 upon which the leaves and fruit grow. 
 
 When it is spring, the tree puts forth leaves 
 and blossoms, and the air is perfumed with a 
 sweet smell. 
 
 The blossoms do not remain long upon the 
 tree; they soon fall off: then the small apples 
 appear. At first they are not larger than a pea ; 
 but they grow bigger every day, till the^ are full 
 grown : then they become ripe, and are fit for 
 use. Many of these tree§ together, are called 
 an orchard. 
 
 SECTION XIX. 
 
 Words of two syllables j accented on the second. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 Ill 1 
 
 A buse af ford ar range bap tize 
 
 ac cuse a muse ar rive be Kef 
 
 a cute ap peal as cribe be Keve 
 
 ad vise a rise as sig-n be stow 
 
52 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 be tween 
 be tray 
 com plain 
 com plaint 
 com pose 
 com plete 
 con ceive 
 con elude 
 de cay 
 de ceit 
 de ceive 
 de cree 
 de light 
 de tain 
 dis course 
 dis play 
 en close 
 
 en dear 
 ex change 
 ex plain 
 ex plore 
 ex pose 
 for sake 
 im peach 
 im pure 
 in deed 
 per spire 
 pre vail 
 pro ceed 
 re deem 
 re lease 
 re lief 
 re lieve 
 
 re pneve 
 re sign 
 re vise 
 se vere 
 sin cere 
 sue ceed 
 trus tee 
 
 2 
 a byss 
 a midst 
 at tempt 
 commence 
 con denm 
 con fess 
 con struct 
 con tempt 
 de fence 
 
 e clipse 
 e quip 
 ex pense 
 ex press 
 ga zette 
 im mense 
 im press 
 in de&t 
 in dulge 
 in flict 
 in fringe 
 in spect 
 in stead 
 in struct 
 of fence 
 op press 
 
 per haps 
 per sist 
 re sent 
 re sist 
 re spect 
 re venge 
 trans act 
 un less 
 un well 
 
 3 
 
 ab hor 
 a dorn 
 be cause 
 de fraud 
 de form 
 in form 
 re ward 
 
 un taught 
 
 4 
 
 a larm 
 de part 
 em ba/m 
 em bark 
 en large 
 mam ma 
 pa pa 
 re mark 
 
 5 
 
 a dopt 
 be long 
 for got 
 re solve 
 re volve 
 
 5 
 
 un lock 
 up on 
 
 6 
 
 ap prove 
 bal loon 
 be hoove 
 im prove 
 sur tout 
 
 8 
 
 a bove 
 a mong 
 be come 
 un done 
 
 9 
 
 con xey 
 o bey 
 sur \ey 
 
 10 
 
 ca price 
 fa tigue 
 in trigwe 
 po lice 
 
 oi 
 
 ap point 
 a void 
 en join 
 ex ploit 
 
 on 
 
 a bound 
 ac count 
 a mount 
 a round 
 de vour 
 de vout 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 THE PICTORIAL 
 
 SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 53 
 
 ! 
 
 1 
 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 
 Synonymous i 
 
 >vords ; in which the second column defines , 
 
 the first, and the first the second. 
 
 
 1 
 
 A bide 
 
 to 
 
 re main 
 
 1 
 
 ac cede to 
 
 2 
 
 con sent 
 
 ab stain 
 
 to 
 
 re frain 
 
 a gree to 
 
 con cur 
 
 ac quire 
 
 to 
 
 at tain 
 
 as sail to 
 
 at tack 
 
 as pire 
 
 to 
 
 de sire 
 
 be moan to 
 
 la ment 
 
 be reave 
 com bine 
 
 to 
 to 
 
 de prive 
 u nite 
 
 j to 
 con cede . 
 to 
 
 as sent ) 
 ad mit £ 
 
 
 to 
 
 con tain ) 
 
 con fuse to 
 
 a bash 
 
 com prise 
 
 to 
 
 in elude £ 
 
 con sign to 
 
 com mit 
 
 con ceal 
 
 to 
 
 se crete 
 
 con vene to 
 
 col lect 
 
 con trive 
 
 to 
 
 de vise 
 
 de prave to 
 
 cor rupt 
 
 de base 
 
 to 
 
 de grade 
 
 de spise to 
 
 con temn 
 
 de cease 
 
 to 
 
 ex pire 
 
 dis close to 
 
 di vulge 
 
 de lude 
 
 to 
 
 be guile 
 
 dis please to 
 
 of fend 
 
 de mean 
 
 to 
 
 be have 
 
 en force to 
 
 com pel 
 
 ef face 
 
 to 
 
 de face 
 
 ex ceed to 
 
 ex eel 
 
 e lude 
 en croach 
 
 to 
 to 
 
 e vade 
 in trude 
 
 foreshow , 
 to 
 
 fore tell ) 
 pre diet \ 
 
 en tice 
 
 to 
 
 al lure 
 
 im pede to 
 
 ob struct 
 
 
 to 
 
 beseech ) 
 
 in crease to 
 
 aug ment 
 re quest 
 
 en treat 
 
 to 
 
 im plore £ 
 
 in vite to 
 
 gen teel 
 
 - 
 
 po lite 
 
 op pose to 
 
 ob ject 
 
 pol lute 
 
 to 
 
 de file 
 
 per suade to 
 
 con vince 
 
 por tray 
 
 to 
 
 de scribe 
 
 post pone to 
 
 ad journ 
 
 pre elude 
 
 to 
 
 ex elude 
 
 re ceive to 
 
 ac cept 
 
 pre sume 
 
 to 
 
 sup pose 
 
 re fuse to 
 
 re ject 
 
 pro claim 
 
 to 
 
 de clare 
 
 re pay to 
 
 re fund 
 
 pro cure 
 
 to 
 
 ob tain 
 
 re store to 
 
 re turn 
 
 re cede 
 
 to 
 
 re treat 
 
 sur vive to 
 
 out live 
 
 re cite 
 
 to 
 
 re peat 
 
 l 
 
 6 
 
 re trieve 
 
 to 
 
 re gain 
 
 re buke to 
 
 re prove 
 
54 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 1 
 
 1 6 
 
 re fute to dis prove 
 
 2 2 
 
 an nex to af fix 
 con dense to com press 
 de duct to sub tract 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 de fend 
 dis turb 
 
 e lect 
 ex pel 
 o mit 
 re but 
 
 pro tect 
 mo lest 
 to perplex 
 to se lect 
 e ject 
 neg lect 
 re pel 
 
 to 
 to 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 2 
 
 re pent 
 re suit 
 sue cum6 to 
 sus pect to 
 
 t 2 
 
 ad judge to 
 a mend to 
 at tack 
 
 2 
 
 re spect 
 
 2 
 
 ad dress 
 re bel 
 
 an 
 
 to 
 
 2 
 
 re gret 
 ef feet 
 sub mit 
 mis trust 
 
 3 
 
 a ward 
 re form 
 as sault 
 
 4 
 
 re gard 
 
 5 
 
 ac cost 
 re volt 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 The following words, which belong to this and the prece- 
 ding section, have the accent sometimes on the first, and 
 sometimes on the second syllable, according to their definition. 
 
 Definition when the accent 
 is on the second syllable. 
 1 2 
 
 Fre quent To visit often. 
 re gress to go back. 
 
 2 1 
 
 es say 
 in crease 
 
 Definition when the- accent is 
 on the first syllable. 
 
 Often done, 
 passage back. 
 
 a short treatise, 
 augmentation, 
 a family name. 
 
 without hope, 
 not present, 
 an abridgment, 
 stress of voice, 
 something added, 
 substance extracted, 
 mark, stamp, 
 printer's name, 
 perfumes burnt. 
 
 sur name 
 
 2 2 
 
 ab ject 
 ab sent 
 ab stract 
 ac cent 
 affix 
 ex tract 
 im press 
 im print 
 in cense 
 
 to attempt, 
 to make more, 
 to add a name. 
 
 to throw away, 
 to withdraw, 
 to take from. 
 to note the accent, 
 to subjoin. 
 to draw out. 
 to stamp, print, 
 to print ; fix. 
 to provoke. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 55 
 
 2 2 
 
 insolence, abuse. in suit to abuse, 
 matter treated of* sub ject to put under. 
 
 5 1 
 
 col league to unite with. 
 
 a partner, 
 a boundary. 
 
 increase. 
 
 the 8th month. 
 
 pain, anguish, 
 
 a short prayer. 
 
 an agreement. 
 
 management. 
 
 a combat. 
 
 a council. 
 
 a dispute, debate. 
 
 bargain, 
 opposition, 
 one convicted, 
 design, purpose. 
 
 con fine 
 
 3 2 
 
 aug ment 
 au gust 
 tor ment 
 
 5 2 
 
 col lect 
 com pact 
 con duct 
 con flict 
 con suit 
 con test 
 con tract 
 con trast 
 con vict 
 
 to limit ; shut up. 
 
 to increase, 
 great, grand, 
 to torture, vex. 
 
 to gather. 
 
 to join together. 
 
 to lead, manage. 
 
 to contest. 
 
 to ask advice. 
 
 to contend. 
 
 to shorten. 
 
 to put in opposition. 
 
 to prove guilty. 
 
 to oppose. 
 
 ob ject 
 
 Useful Lessons. 
 
 Henry, how many barley-corns make an inch? 
 Three. Twelve inches make a foot ; three feet 
 make a yard ; five yards and a half make a rod, 
 perch or pole ; forty rods make a furlong ; eight 
 furlongs make a mile; and three miles a league. 
 
 William, can you tell how many gills make a 
 pint ? Four. Two pints make a quart ; four 
 quarts make a gallon ; thirty-one and a half 
 gallons make a barrel ; four barrels make a 
 pipe ; and two pipes a tun. 
 
 How many single things make a score ? 
 Twenty. Twelve make a dozen, and twelve 
 dozen a gross. 
 
56 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Twenty-four sheets of paper make a quire; 
 twenty quires a ream ; and ten reams a bale. 
 
 SECTION XX. 
 Familiar Lessons, illustrated by Pictures. 
 
 Come here, Charles, and 
 look at these pretty little 
 birds. Here is the robin, 
 the sparrow, the yellow 
 bird, the wren, the cat-bird, 
 the lark, the linnet, the 
 blue-bird, the swallow, the 
 martin, the hang-bird, and 
 the little humming-bird, 
 
 which is the smallest, and most beautiful of all 
 
 the feathered tribe, 
 
 Dear little birds, how they sing and play. 
 
 Let us sit down on the green grass, in the shade 
 
 of this tree, and hear them sing their sweet songs. 
 
 Henry, here is a cat ; 
 see how quiet and mild 
 she looks ! Puss has 
 sharp claws, but she will 
 not bite nor scratch, un- 
 less you hurt her. 
 Puss catches rats, and mice, and birds. She 
 lies in wait, and springs upon her prey, which 
 she takes by surprise : she then sports with the 
 poor little animal, before she kills him. 
 
 Cats dislike water, and cold : they love to 
 bask in the sun, and lie on soft cushions. 
 
 Puss is sly and treacherous, and if she has a j 
 chance, will steal your breakfast or dinner. 
 
'•-- v --- -ri-^n 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 57 
 
 Here are some beauti- 
 ful little kitteng. See how 
 quiet and still they lie! 
 You must give them some 
 new milk. Puss has been 
 catching some mice for 
 them. 
 
 The little kittens are playful, and very amu- 
 sing. You may play with them, but do not 
 hurt them. 
 
 Early at School. 
 
 The hour is come, I must not stay, 
 But haste to school without delay ; 
 Nor loiter here, for 'tis a crime 
 To trifle thus with precious time. 
 
 These golden hours will soon be o'er 
 When I can go to school no more : 
 How painful then would be the thought, 
 That I had spent my time for naught. 
 
 SECTION XXL 
 
 Words of three syllables, accented on the first. 
 
 Beau ti ful 
 bra zen ness 
 ca pa ble 
 care ful ness 
 di a logwe 
 du pli cate 
 du ra ble 
 for ci b\e 
 fre quen cy 
 glo ri ous 
 i die ness 
 
 1 
 
 ju bi lee 
 ju ve nile 
 live li hood 
 no ble ness 
 nu mer ous 
 pre vi ous 
 se ri ous 
 so ber ness 
 u ni form 
 u ni verse 
 va ri ous 
 
 ac cu rate 
 ad jec tive 
 ag gra vate 
 al pha bet 
 ban ish mcnt 
 bur den some 
 cab i net 
 cat a ract 
 chan eel lor 
 civ il ize 
 clem en cy 
 
58 THE 
 
 PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 cyl in der 
 
 2 
 
 pun ish ment 
 
 4 
 
 part ner ship 
 
 dif fer ence 
 
 read i ness 
 
 5 
 
 dis ci pline 
 
 rec om pense 
 
 col o ny 
 
 ed i fice 
 
 ref er ence 
 
 com e dy 
 
 el o quent 
 
 rel a tive 
 
 com pe tence 
 
 em pha sis 
 
 res o lute 
 
 con ju gate 
 
 en ter prise 
 
 sen si ble 
 
 con so nant 
 
 ep i taph 
 
 set tie ment 
 
 con ti nent 
 
 ev i dence 
 
 sim pie ton 
 
 con tra ry 
 
 fern i nine 
 
 skel e ton 
 
 hor ri ble 
 
 gen tie man 
 
 sub sti tute 
 
 Ion gi tude 
 
 hap pi ness 
 
 syl la ble 
 
 mon u ment 
 
 heav i ness 
 
 tern per ance 
 
 nov el ty 
 
 hes i tate 
 
 ten der ness 
 
 ob li gate 
 
 im pu dence 
 
 ter ri ble 
 
 ob so lete 
 
 in fa mous 
 
 trans i tive 
 
 ob sti nate 
 
 in flu ence 
 
 troub le some 
 
 of fi cer 
 
 in no cence 
 
 ut ter ance 
 
 or a cle 
 
 in ter view 
 
 ven om ous 
 
 or a tor 
 
 jeal ous y 
 
 vis i ble 
 
 pop u lar 
 
 man u script 
 
 wil der ness 
 
 pos si ble 
 
 mas cu line 
 
 3 
 
 prob a ble 
 
 mes sen ger 
 
 au di ble 
 
 prop a gate 
 
 mis er y 
 
 cor po rate 
 
 prop er ty 
 
 neg li gence 
 
 for ti tude 
 
 pros e cute 
 
 par a ble 
 
 mor ti fy 
 
 pros o dy 
 
 par a graph 
 
 or na ment 
 
 prot est ant 
 
 pen i tence 
 
 4 
 
 prov i dence 
 
 pes ti lence 
 
 ar gu ment 
 
 quad ru ped 
 
 pref er ence 
 
 ar ti cle 
 
 qual i fy 
 
 pres i dent 
 
 car pen ter 
 
 qual i ty 
 
 prim i tive 
 
 par ti cle 
 
 sol i tude 
 
jl" 1 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 63 
 
 I 
 
 de ceit ful 
 
 2 
 
 de cep tive 
 
 de ceiv er a pre tend er 
 
 re cli ning 
 
 re cum bent 
 
 re tain ing a re ten tion 
 
 un ceas ing 
 
 2 
 
 pre cur sor i 
 
 in ces sant 
 
 2 
 
 i fore run ner 
 
 re luc tant 
 
 un wil ling 
 
 re pug nance 
 
 re luc tance 
 
 vin die tive - re venge ful 
 
 2 1 
 
 em bel lish to heau ti fy 
 
 pi az za a por ti co 
 
 2 2 
 
 a bun dant - plen ti ful 
 
 ad van tage 
 
 ben e fit 
 
 as sas sin 
 
 mur der er 
 
 dis sem bier a 
 
 \ hyp o crite 
 
 en cour age to an i mate 
 
 ex is tence 
 
 en ti ty 
 
 ob struc tion 
 
 bin der ance 
 
 re sem bling 
 
 sim i lar 
 
 re spect ful 
 
 af fa h\e 
 
 u ten sil an im pie ment 
 
 Questions upon the preceding section. 
 
 What sound has u in a-bu-sive ? 
 
 By what figure is it governed 1 
 
 What figure governs it 1 
 
 What does figure 5 represent 1 
 
 What does figure 1 represent ? 
 
 What sound has o in at-tor-ney ? 
 
 What sound has e in al-read-y ? 
 
 By what figure is it governed ] 
 
 What figure governs it] 
 
 What does figure 8 represent 1 
 
 What does figure 2 represent 1 
 
 What sound has e in sur-vey-orl 
 
 What sound has o in irn-mor-tal 1 
 
 By what figure is it governed ? 
 
 What figure governs it 1 
 
 What does figure 9 represent 1 
 
 What does figure 3 represent 1 
 
 What letter is silent in a-bu-sive 1 
 
 What sound has a in em-bar-go ? 
 
 What letter is silent in al-read-y 1 
 
 What figure governs it ] 
 
 What sound has s in ho-san-na? 
 
 What does figure 4 represent 1 
 
 What sound has ph in blas-phe-mer ? 
 
 What sound has o in a-bol-ish ? 
 
 What letter is silent in un-friend-lyl 
 
64 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION XXIV. 
 
 Words of three syllables, accented on the third. 
 
 Ad ver tise 
 ap per tain 
 bom bard ier 
 brig a dier 
 can non ier 
 cav a lier 
 co in cide 
 dis ap pear 
 dis be lieve 
 en gi neer 
 en ter tain 
 fore or dain 
 gren a dier 
 in sin cere 
 in ter weave 
 
 o ver reach 
 pre en gage 
 pre ma ture 
 pri va teer 
 ref er ee 
 un be lief 
 
 2 
 ac qui esce 
 con de scend 
 dis con tent 
 o ver act 
 o ver head 
 re com mence 
 re con duct 
 un der sell 
 
 af ter noon 
 dis ap prove 
 o ver do 
 o ver shoot 
 
 8 
 
 o ver come 
 
 10 
 
 bom ba sin 
 mag a zine 
 man da rin 
 quar an tine 
 
 oi 
 
 coun ter poise 
 dis ap point 
 o ver poise 
 
 In the remaining part of this section, each column defines 
 the other. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 dis en gage 
 in ter fere 
 su per vise 
 
 in ter lace 
 
 2 
 
 com pre hend 
 
 in ter cept 
 
 l 
 dis re pute 
 in sin cere 
 
 2 
 
 in ter diet 
 rep re sent 
 
 to dis u nite 
 to in ter pose 
 to o ver see 
 
 2 
 
 to in ter mix 
 
 to un der stand 
 to in ter rupt 
 
 2 
 
 dis cred it 
 dis sem bling 
 
 to pro hib it 
 to ex hib it 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 65 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION XXV. 
 
 
 
 
 
 mil 
 
 IP 
 
 39i!llli!Sii!li!l{{ynill!!llll 
 
 PlSllltlSlll 
 
 ||HRt 
 
 
 jiilfil™ 
 
 r^SKSKKHtm^ ^ -^ 
 
 ■ill 
 
 
 HPH 
 
 
 
 H-* ; Ha ^^^» 
 
 ssPlfi'iilill^^^llilil 
 
 
 a^ypr^S^Agwii 
 
 
 life' 
 
 :..: " \'.?; ".' '^\'--:.e- V- ■ 
 
 ^^^^M^j^Mj|y 
 
 
 
 
 ^^^^B 
 
 pIihBI 
 
 
 ff/*\j^ 
 
 ^WTtt 
 
 bbhSh&i 
 
 >y>iriii:iiiiiiihI3rnriniiuiiniiminiTiinnjjAi^ 
 
 
 9^9 
 
 
 
 ^^ ■ -'^^^5>^~- "~~ - .^JSgjjglj 
 
 
 
 
 T%e Happy Family. 
 
 Here is the picture of a happy family, sitting 
 round the cheerful fire, in a cold winter's eve- 
 ning. The father is sitting by his wife, smoking 
 a pipe ; his dog lies sleeping at his feet. 
 
 The mother is sitting by her husband, with a 
 child in her arms ; while the playful cat is 
 standing by her side. Jane, the eldest of the 
 children, is spinning. She spins flax into yarn 
 or thread, which is woven into cloth. 
 
 George, James, and Joseph, are studying their 
 books. They go to school. They are learning 
 their lessons, that each one may be first in his 
 class. 
 
 These parents love their children, and are very 
 kind to them. They took care of them when 
 they were young and helpless ; when they could 
 do nothing but cry, and give a great deal of 
 trouble. 
 
 They take much care to instruct their chil- 
 dren ; to provide food for them to eat, and 
 
 6* "'"" "'"" ™ 
 
\ aa I 
 
 /66 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 clothes for them to wear. When sick and in dis- 
 tress, they pity them, and kindly wait upon them. 
 
 These are all good children : they are very 
 thankful for the kindness of their parents, and do 
 all in their power to make them happy. They 
 always obey their father and mother, and try to 
 please them. 
 
 If denied what they want, they never grumble, 
 nor get angry ; but think their parents know 
 best what is proper for them. 
 
 These good children are never guilty of 
 telling lies. If they do any mischief, they will 
 confess it, and say they are very sorry, and will 
 try to do so no more ; then their parents and 
 friends will not be angry with them. 
 
 They pray daily to God, that he would be 
 pleased of his mercy and goodness to preserve 
 their parents and friends, that they may live 
 many years, and by that means have it in their 
 power to instruct them, and train them up in 
 virtue and knowledge. 
 
 They love one another, and likewise all their 
 playmates. They never swear, nor use bad 
 words, nor call ill names. They are never 
 peevish, nor fretful ; but always cheerful and 
 good humoured. 
 
 I hope the little girls and boys who read this, 
 will try to imitate the example of these good 
 children. 
 
 Then their parents, and teachers, and all their 
 friends, will love them ; and God, their Heavenly 
 Father, who knows all their thoughts, hears all 
 their words, and sees all their actions, will love 
 them likewise. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 67 
 
 SECTION XXVI. 
 Words of four syllables, accented on the first. 
 
 2 
 
 in no cent ly 
 in ter est ing 
 nav i ga ble 
 per ish a ble 
 pref er a h\e 
 pun ish a ble 
 
 A mi a b\e 
 xea son a h\e 
 va ri e gate 
 vi o lent ly 
 
 4 
 
 ar bi tra ry 
 bar ba rous ly 
 par don a ble 
 par ti cip \e 
 
 ad mi ra h\e 
 am i ca ble 
 an swer a b\e 
 ap pli ca h\e 
 cat er pil lar 
 dil i gent ly 
 el e gant ly 
 el i gi ble 
 fash ion a ble 
 im po ten cy 
 
 reg u la tor 
 rep u ta bis 
 sec on da ry 
 sev er al ly 
 spec u la tive 
 suf fer a ble 
 tab er na cle 
 tern per ate ly 
 tern per a ture 
 
 com i cal ness 
 com men ta ry 
 com mon al ty 
 com pe tent ly 
 con tro ver sy 
 hos pi ta ble 
 mod er ate ly 
 nom i na live 
 ob sti na cy 
 pos i tive ly 
 
 In the remaining part of this section, each column defines 
 
 the other. 
 2 2 
 
 char i ta ble 
 des pi ca ble 
 ir ri ta ble 
 mis er a bly 
 sem i na ry 
 mis er a ble 
 
 2 
 
 rel ish a ble 
 ad ver sa ry 
 die tion a ry 
 ig no min y 
 pred a to ry 
 sane ti mo ny 
 
 an 
 a 
 
 be nev o lent 
 con tempt i ble 
 i ras ci ble 
 un hap pi ly 
 a cad e my 
 un hap py 
 
 2 
 
 pal at a ble 
 en e my 
 lex i con 
 in fa my 
 plun der ing 
 sane ti ty 
 
68 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION XXVII. 
 Money, and Metals. 
 
 William, can you tell how money is made ? 
 
 Money is coined from metals of different 
 value ; gold, silver, and copper. Most metals 
 are made from ore, which is dug out of the 
 ground from a place called a mine. 
 
 The gold coins of the United States, are 
 eagles, half eagles, and quarter eagles. An 
 eagle is worth ten dollars ; a half eagle, five ; 
 and a quarter eagle, two and a half. 
 
 The silver coins are dollars, half dollars, quar- 
 ters, dimes, and half dimes. The value of a 
 dollar, is one hundred cents ; the half dollar, 
 fifty cents ; the quarter, twenty-five cents ; the 
 dime, ten cents ; and the half dime, five cents. 
 
 Cents are copper coins ; one hundred of 
 which make a dollar. 
 
 There are other metals beside those used 
 for money ; such as iron, lead, tin, and quick- 
 silver. Metals are the heaviest substances known 
 in the world. 
 
 Gold is a very heavy metal, and weighs more 
 than nineteen times as much as water. That is, 
 a cup full of gold would be heavier than a quan- 
 tity of water sufficient to fill the same cup nine- 
 teen times. 
 
 Silver is eleven times heavier than water. 
 
 Copper is nearly nine times heavier. 
 
 Iron is eight times heavier than water. 
 
 Lead is twelve times heavier than water. 
 
 Tin is seven times heavier than water. 
 
 Quicksilver is fifteen times heavier than water. 
 
THE PICTORTAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 69 j 
 
 Brass is made of copper and zinc. 
 Steel, of which scissors, knives, and many other 
 things are made, is prepared from iron. 
 
 Questions upon the preceding Section* — to be answered by 
 the pupil. 
 
 Of what is money made 1 What metals are coined for money I 
 From what are metals made] What is the place called from which 
 ore is taken 1 What are the gold coins of the United States 1 
 What is the value of an eagle 1 What is the value of a half eagle ? 
 What is the value of a quarter eagle 1 Can you name some of the 
 silver coins 1 What is the value of a dollar 1 How many cents 
 make a half dollar ! How many cents make a dime 1 How many 
 a half dime ! What are copper coins 1 What metals are not used 
 for money ? What are the heaviest substances known in the 
 world 1 How much heavier is gold than water 1 Of what is brass 
 made ! From what is steel prepared ? 
 
 SECTION XXVIII. 
 
 Words of four syllables, accented on the second. 
 
 A gree a b\e 
 an ni hi late 
 ap pro pri ate 
 de si ra b\e 
 de spi ^a b\e 
 er ro ne ous 
 fe lo ni ous 
 har mo ni ous 
 im mu ta b\e 
 in ca pa b\e 
 in de cen cy 
 in ju ri ous 
 la bo ri ous 
 mys te ri ous 
 no to ri ous 
 
 ob tarn a b\e 
 pre ca ri ous 
 sa lu bri ous 
 sa lu bri ty 
 spon ta ne ous 
 sup port a b\e 
 vie to ri ous 
 
 2 
 
 ac ces si b\e 
 am phib i ous 
 a nal y sis 
 as cen den cy 
 be nef i cence 
 ca lam i tous 
 co in ci dence 
 
 col lee tive ly 
 com bus ti b\e 
 con spic u ous 
 con tin gen cy 
 con tin u al 
 con tin u ance 
 de clar a tivc 
 de lir i ous 
 de lir i um 
 de liv er ance 
 de liv er y 
 de riv a tive 
 di min u tive 
 dis sat is fy 
 dis trib u tive 
 
 * The practice of frequently exercising children in answering ques- 
 tions upon what they have read, is strongly recommended to teachers. 
 It forms a pleasing variety in their exercises, and at the same time 
 gives them a better knowledge of what they read. 
 
70 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 e vap o rate 
 ex pres si b\e 
 ex trav a gant 
 il lib er al 
 i! lus tri ous 
 im mac u late 
 irn pen i tence 
 im pen i tent 
 in ae cu rate 
 in an i mate 
 in cred i ble 
 in dif fer ence 
 in dus tri ous 
 in el e gant 
 in fin i tive 
 in grat i tude 
 in quis i tive 
 in teg ri ty 
 in tel li gence 
 in tern per ate 
 in tim i date 
 in ves ti gate 
 
 In the remaining part 
 1 
 
 Con gru i ty 
 ex pe ri ence 
 im pe ri ous 
 re la tion ship 
 se cu ri ty 
 
 a dul ter ate 
 am big u ous 
 ca tas tro phe 
 ce ler i ty 
 
 in vin ci ble 
 in vis i b\e 
 ma lev o lent 
 mi rac u lous 
 per plex i ty 
 pre med i tate 
 
 bi og ra phy 
 com mod i ty 
 de moc ra cy 
 de pop u late 
 e con o my 
 e mol u ment 
 
 pro mis cu ous e quality 
 re spec ta ble ge og ra phy 
 
 ri die u lous 
 stu pid i ty 
 su prem a cy 
 sus cep ti b\e 
 u nan i mous 
 un gen er ous 
 vi cis si tude 
 
 5 
 
 a nom a ly 
 a non y mous 
 a pol o gize 
 a pol o gy 
 a pos ta cy 
 as trol o gy 
 
 of this section, the words are synonymous. 
 
 con sis ten cy 
 ex per i ment 
 im per a tive 
 af fin i ty 
 in dem ni ty 
 
 2 
 
 to con tam in ate 
 
 e quiv o cal 
 a ca lam i ty 
 
 ra pid i ty 
 
 hy poc ri sy 
 i dol a try 
 im pos si b\e 
 ma hog a ny 
 ma jor i ty 
 me trop o lis 
 mi nor i ty 
 phi losopher 
 pre rog a tive 
 sy non y mous 
 
 8 
 
 ac com pa ny 
 dis cov er y 
 re cov er y 
 

 
 
 ... 
 
 J THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 71 
 
 2 
 
 com mis er ate 
 
 to 
 
 2 
 
 com pas sion ate 
 
 e pit o me 
 ma lev o lence 
 
 m 
 
 com pen di um 
 ma lig ni ty 
 
 pe riph e ry 
 
 - 
 
 cir cum fer ence 
 
 pro pin qui ty 
 re luc tant ly 
 re venge ful ness 
 
 - 
 
 prox im i ty 
 un wil ling ly 
 vin die tive ness 
 
 si mil i tude 
 
 a 
 
 com par i son 
 
 vin die tive ly 
 
 - 
 
 re venge ful ly 
 
 a nal o gy 
 
 - 
 
 re sem blance 
 
 de lib er ate 
 
 to 
 
 con sid er 
 
 dis crim in ate 
 
 to 
 
 dis tin guish 
 
 ac eel er ate 
 
 to 
 
 Z 
 
 ex pe dite 
 
 am bas sa dor 
 
 a 
 
 min is ter 
 
 be nev o lence 
 
 - 
 
 char i ty 
 
 ex ten u ate 
 
 to 
 
 pal i ate 
 
 in vid i ous 
 
 - 
 
 en vi ous 
 
 i tin er ant 
 
 - 
 
 trav el ling 
 
 pro gen i tor 
 
 SECT 
 
 - 
 
 an ces tor 
 XXIX. 
 
 HON 
 
 Words of four syllables, 
 
 accented on the third, 
 i 
 
 1 
 Ad van ta geous 
 
 
 con tri bu tion 
 
 ap pli ca tion 
 
 
 con ver sa tion 
 
 ap pro ba tion 
 eel e bra tion 
 
 
 cor po ra tion 
 cul ti va tion 
 
 com pen sa tion 
 
 
 dis a gree ment 
 
 com pi la tion 
 
 
 en ter tain ment 
 
 con dem na tion 
 
 
 es ti ma tion 
 
 con fla gra tion 
 
 
 ex pi ra tion 
 
 con sti tu tion 
 
 
 ex pla na tion 
 
 
 
 
72 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 in dig na tion 
 in no va tion 
 in sti tu tion 
 med i ta tion 
 mod er a tion 
 nav i ga tion 
 oc cu pa tion 
 per se cu tion 
 pop u la tion 
 pres er va tion 
 pros e cu tion 
 pub li ca tion 
 rec re a tion 
 rev o lu tion 
 su per vi sor 
 
 In the remaining part of this 
 
 1 
 
 al le ga tion 
 de por ta tion 
 de vas ta tion 
 
 dec o ra tion 
 in cli na tion 
 
 con ster na tion 
 
 2 
 
 rem i nis cence 
 
 ac ci den tal 
 
 de re lie tion 
 
 con va les cent 
 
 l 
 dim i nu tion 
 hab i ta tion 
 
 sup pli ca tion 
 trib u la tion 
 
 2 
 
 ap pre hen sion 
 com pre hen sion 
 com pre hen sive 
 con de seen sion 
 con tra die tion 
 dis ad van tage 
 in con sis tent 
 in ter rup tion 
 om ni pres ence 
 om ni pres ent 
 res ur rec tion 
 sat is fac tion 
 
 section, the words are synonymous. 
 1 
 
 af fir ma tion 
 trans por ta tion 
 des o la tion 
 
 2 
 
 em bel lish ment 
 pro pen si ty 
 
 5 
 
 as ton ish ment 
 
 2 
 
 rec ol lee tion 
 
 l 
 for tu i tous 
 
 2 
 
 a ban don ment 
 
 8 
 
 re cov er ing 
 
 2 
 
 les sen ing 
 a res i dence 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 73 
 
 SECTION XXX. 
 
 Words of four syllables, accented on the fourth. 
 
 Char i ot eer 
 el e cam pane 
 
 su per in duce 
 
 2 
 an te pe nult 
 fan far o nade 
 mis ap pre hend 
 
 mis rep re hend 
 mis rep re sent 
 mis un der stand 
 mul ti pli cand 
 su per in tend 
 
 ou 
 
 su per a bound 
 
 SECTION XXXI. 
 
 The Monkeys. 
 
 Here is a picture of some monkeys, imitating 
 the actions of men. One of them is drinking 
 from a wine-glass ; another is eating apples ; and 
 the other, while his master is absent, is trying to 
 shave himself. 
 
 There is no other animal that looks so much 
 like man, nor that tries so much to imitate his 
 actions. They are found in warm countries, and 
 are very active, and full of mischief. 
 
 There is a great variety of monkeys ; and their 
 size varies from twelve inches to four feet in 
 
74 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 length. In their wild state, they inhabit the 
 woods, and feed on fruit and nuts. 
 
 The Monkey turned Painter* 
 
 He handles his hrush, and he looks very keen, 
 A more comical painter sure never was seen. 
 
 Monkeys are very playful animals ; there is no 
 end to their tricks : they are so full of mischief, 
 that if they were not secured, they would do a 
 greal deal of injury. 
 
 A painter once had a monkey that was so full 
 of mischief, that he was always kept chained : 
 but he could see his master at work, and he said 
 to himself, if I were at liberty, I would paint too. 
 
 Soon after, his chain got broken : now, says 
 he, I will turn painter ; so he took up the palette 
 and pencil, as his master used to do, and began 
 to work. 
 
 The painter came in when the monkey was 
 very busy. This is pretty work, says the paint- 
 er; but I will teach you better manners; sohefast- 
 ened his chain again, and flogged him severely. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 75 
 
 There are many little boys, who like monkeys, 
 are always full of mischief. They are so mis- 
 chievous, that we sometimes have to flog them, 
 as this man did his monkey. 
 
 SECTION XXXIL 
 
 TEA PLANT, SUGAR CANE, COFFEE PLANT. 
 
 Tea is the dried leaves of a plant or shrub, 
 which grows chiefly in China. The only valua- 
 ble part of it, is the leaves, which are of a dark 
 green colour. 
 
 They are gathered, and dried ; then put into 
 boxes, and sent to different parts of the world to 
 be used. The wood of the tea plant is hard, and 
 of a whitish green colour. Its flowers resemble 
 those of the white wild rose. 
 
 Coffee grows in the centre of a kind of fruit 
 like a cherry, of a deep red colour. The tree 
 or bush that bears it, grows only in warm 
 countries. 
 
 The fruit is gathered, and spread on mats to 
 dry; and then bruised with rollers, to force out 
 the seed : this divides thern into two parts. It 
 
76 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 is afterwards replaced on the mats, and when 
 dry, is fit for use. 
 
 Sugar is made from a kind of reed called 
 sugar-cane, which grows in warm countries. It 
 grows from four to twelve feet high. The stalks 
 are carried to a mill, where they are ground or 
 broken, and the sweet juice pressed out. This 
 juice is boiled, to make sugar and molasses. 
 
 White or loaf sugar is made of brown sugar, 
 by refining it. Sugar is sometimes made from 
 the sap of maple trees. 
 
 Salt is made of sea-water, and from springs of 
 salt water, by boiling it, or by exposure to the 
 sun. That which is called rock-salt, is dug out 
 of the earth, from salt mines. 
 
 Pepper is the fruit or seed of a plant resem- 
 bling the grape vine, which grows in the East 
 Indies. 
 
 Allspice or pimento, grows upon a tree found 
 in many parts of the island of Jamaica. 
 
 Ginger is the root of a plant, which grows in 
 the East and West Indies. 
 
 Cinnamon is the bark of a small tree, which 
 grows in the East Indies. After it is stripped 
 from the tree, and dried, it is fit for use. 
 
 Oranges and Lemons, grow like apples, on 
 small trees. The trees that bear them, grow in 
 warm countries. 
 
 Nutmegs are the fruit of a tree which grows 
 in the East Indies. Cloves are the flowers of a 
 plant which grows in the same place. 
 
 Figs are the fruit of a tree which grows in 
 warm climates. Almonds are a kind of nut. 
 Raisins a^e dried grapes. i 
 
THE PICTORIAL I 
 
 SPELLING-BOOK. 7? 
 
 SECTION 
 
 XXXIII. 
 
 Words of jive syllables. 
 
 accented on the second. 
 
 l 
 Ab ste mi ous ness 
 
 in dif fer ent ly 
 
 ac cu mu la tor 
 
 in dis so lu b\e 
 
 cen so ri ous ness 
 
 in dus tri ous ly 
 
 com mu ni ca tive 
 
 in es ti ma b\e 
 
 har mo ni ous ly 
 
 in ev i ta b\e 
 
 in nu mer a b\e 
 
 in flam ma to ry 
 
 in va ri a b\e 
 
 in hab it a b\e 
 
 in vi o la b\e 
 
 in quis i tive ness 
 
 la bo ri ous ly 
 
 in suf fer a b\e 
 
 ma te ri al ly 
 
 in tel li gi b\e 
 
 mys te ri ous ly 
 
 in tem per ate ly 
 
 un rea son a ble 
 
 in val u a ble 
 
 2 
 
 in vet er a cy 
 
 ca lum ni a tor 
 
 in vul ner a b\e 
 
 com mem o ra tive 
 
 mag nif i cent ly 
 
 com par a tive ly 
 
 mi rac u lous ly 
 
 con fed er a cy 
 
 par tic u lar ly 
 
 con sid er a b\e 
 
 un char i ta b\e 
 
 con tin u al ly 
 
 ui) fash ion a b\e 
 
 co tern po ra ry 
 
 un mer ci ful ly 
 
 de clam a to ry 
 
 vo cab u la ry 
 
 de gen er a cy 
 
 5 
 
 de lib er ate ly 
 
 con sol a to ry 
 
 de lib er ate ness 
 
 de rog a to ry 
 
 ef fern i na cy 
 
 de pos i to ry 
 
 ex clam a to ry 
 
 in cor ri gi b\e 
 
 ex trav a gant ly 
 
 in hos pi ta ble 
 
 im pen e tra b\e 
 
 in tol er a ble 
 
 im prac ti ca b\e 
 
 in vol un ta ry 
 
 in def i nite ly 
 
 prog nos ti ca tor 
 
78 THE PICTORIAL 
 
 SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION 
 
 XXXIV. 
 
 Words of Jive syllables, 
 
 accented on the third. 
 
 i 
 Am bi gu i ty 
 
 2 
 
 di a met ri cal 
 
 cer e nio ni ous 
 
 du ra bil i ty 
 
 dis a gree a ble 
 
 em blem at i cal 
 
 ex com inu ni cate 
 
 ep i dem i cal 
 
 im ma te ri al 
 
 gen e al o gy 
 
 im pro pri e ty 
 
 gen er al i ty 
 
 in ge nu i ty 
 
 hos pi tal i ty 
 
 in stan ta ne ous 
 
 im mor tal i ty 
 
 mat ri mo ni al 
 
 im per cept i b\e 
 
 mer i to ri ous 
 
 in ar tic u late 
 
 mis eel la ne ous 
 
 in con sid er ate 
 
 no to ri e ty 
 
 in cor rupt i ble 
 
 op por tu ni ty 
 
 in fi del i ty 
 
 per spi cu i ty 
 
 in sig nif i cance 
 
 pres by te ri an 
 
 in sig nif i cant 
 
 sub ter ra ne ous 
 
 in sin cer i ty 
 
 su per flu i ty 
 
 in tro due to ry 
 
 tes ti mo ni al 
 
 lib er al i ty 
 
 2 
 
 mag na nim i ty 
 
 ac a dem i cal 
 
 met a phys i cal 
 per pen die u lar 
 
 al pha bet i cal 
 
 an ni ver sa ,y 
 com pre hen si h\e 
 
 pop u lar i ty 
 pos si bil i ty 
 
 con tra die to ry 
 
 5 
 
 prob a bil i ty 
 
 an i mos i ty 
 
 prod i gal i ty 
 
 ar is toe ra cy 
 
 reg u lar i ty 
 
 as tro nom i cal 
 
 rep re sent a tive 
 
 cu ri os i ty 
 
 sen si bil i ty 
 
 et y mol o gy 
 
 cred i bil i ty 
 
 gen er os i ty 
 
 dem o crat i cal 
 
 in ter rog a tive 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION XXXVII. 
 i tine. 
 
 Now, James, we shall tell you something about: 1 
 time ; and then ask some questions upon it, to 
 see if you understand what you read. 
 
 Time is a portion of duration; as a minute, an 
 hour, a day, a year. Here is a picture of 
 
 THE WATCH, CLOCK, DIAL, AND HOUR GLASS, 
 
 by which time is measured. Time is divided into 
 seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, 
 years, and centuries, 
 
 A second of time is only as long as it takes to 
 count one, two. Sixty of these seconds make one 
 minute. Sixty minutes make an hour. Twenty- 
 four hours make a day : and seven days a week. 
 
 Three hundred and sixty-five days make one 
 year. The year contains fifty-two weeks ; or 
 twelve months. The names of the twelve months, 
 are January, February, March, April, May, June, 
 July, August September, October, November, 
 December. One hundred years make a century. 
 
 Time that is gone, is called past time ; that 
 which is now, is called present ; and that which 
 is to come is called future. The day before the 
 present, is called yesterday : that which is now, 
 
 is called to-day; and thatwhn 
 is called to-morrow. 
 
 h is to come aext, 
 
80 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 The days of the week are called Sunday, Mon- 
 day, 'Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, 
 Saturday. When God made the world, he divi- 
 ded the days into weeks. In six days he made 
 the sun, moon, and stars; the beasts, birds, and 
 fish ; the herbs, plants, and trees ; and all things 
 that are in the world : but on the seventh day he 
 rested ; and made it a day of holy rest, which 
 he called the sabbath. 
 
 An era, is time measured from a particular 
 date. Time was reckoned before Christ, from 
 the beginning of the world. It was four thou- 
 sand and four years after the world was made, 
 before the christian era commenced. The chris- 
 tian era commenced at the birth of Christ; which 
 was one thousand eight hundred and thirty-nine 
 years ago. 
 
 Our time began a few years ago, and will end 
 when our bodies die. When our bodies die, we 
 shall live in eternity. Time has a beginning, 
 and will have an end : eternity is without begin- 
 ning, and without end. We live in time, but 
 God lives in eternity. 
 
 Questions upon the preceding Section. 
 
 What is time ? How is time measured ? How is time divided ? 
 What is a second of time ? How many seconds are there in a minute ? 
 How many minutes in an hour ? How many hours in a day 1 How 
 many days m a week ? What are they called ? How many days are 
 there in a year? How many weeks in a year? How many months 
 in a year? What are they called? How many years make a cen- 
 tury ? What is the day before the present, called ? What is the day 
 which is now, called? What is the day that is to come next, called'? 
 When God made the world, how did he divide the days? What did 
 he call the day on which he rested ? What is an era ? From what 
 date was time reckoned before Christ? How many years after the 
 world was made before the christian era commenced 1 When did 
 the christian era commence? How many years since] 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 81 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Words of Jive syllables , 
 
 Ab bre vi a tion 
 ac com mo da tion 
 ad min is tra tion 
 ad min is tra tor 
 ad min is tra trix 
 am pli fi ca tion 
 ar tic u la tion 
 clas si fi ca tion 
 com mem o ra tion 
 com mu ni ca tion 
 con tin u a tion 
 ed i fi ca tion 
 e lu ci da tion 
 e vac u a tion 
 
 XXXVI. 
 
 accented on the fourth. 
 
 for ti fi ca tion 
 glo ri fi ca tion 
 hu mil i a tion 
 in cor po ra tion 
 in ter pre ta tion 
 in tox i ca tion 
 in ves ti ga tion 
 mod i fi ca tion 
 mul ti pli ca tion 
 pre des ti na tion 
 pu ri fi ca tion 
 rat i fi ca tion 
 re gen er a tion 
 ver si fi ca tion 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Words of six syllables, 
 
 l 
 Cer e mo ni ous ly 
 cer e mo ni ous ness 
 dis a gree a h\e ness 
 im ma te ri al ly 
 im ma te ri al ness 
 in cor po re al ly 
 in dis pen sa ble ness 
 in stan ta ne ous ly 
 mer i to ri ous ly 
 mer i to ri ous ness 
 mul ti fa ri ous ly 
 mul ti fa ri ous ness 
 par si mo ni ous ly 
 par si mo ni ous ness 
 
 XXXVII. 
 
 accented on the third. 
 
 2 
 
 in con sid er a h\e 
 in con sid er ate ly 
 in con sid er ate ness 
 in de fat i ga b\e 
 in sig nif i cant ly 
 par a graph i cal ly 
 rec om mend a to ry 
 un in hab it a ble 
 
 5 
 
 al le gor i cal ly 
 an a torn i cal ly 
 as tro nom i cal ly 
 in ter rog a tive ly 
 in ter rog a to ry 
 
82 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Words of six syllables, 
 
 Ap pli ca bil i ty 
 ar is to crat i cal 
 de cep ti bil i ty 
 de feet i bil i ty 
 dis sat is fac to ry 
 hi e ro glyph i cal 
 im mu ta bil i ty 
 im pos si bil i ty 
 in cred i bil i ty 
 in fal li bil i ty 
 in flex i bil i ty 
 in sen si bil i ty 
 in stru men tai i ty 
 
 XXXIX. 
 
 accented on the fourth. 
 
 2 
 in vis i bil i ty 
 ma te ri al i ty 
 pen e tra bil i ty 
 per cep ti bil i ty 
 sem i di am e ter 
 su per a bun dant ly 
 su per in tend en cy 
 sus cep ti bil i ty 
 
 5 
 
 an te ri or i ty 
 in fe ri or i ty 
 me te o rol o gy 
 su pe ri or i ty 
 
 SECTION XL. 
 
 Words of seven syllables, accented on the fifth. 
 
 Com mu ni ca bil i ty 
 im ma te ri al i ty 
 im pen e tra bil i ty 
 im prac ti ca bil i ty 
 in com bus ti bil i ty 
 in com pat i bil i ty 
 
 in dis so lu bil i ty 
 in di vid u al i ty 
 in di vis i bil i ty 
 in ev i ta bil i ty 
 in im i ta bil i ty 
 in sep a ra bil i ty 
 
 in com pres si bil i ty in tel li gi bil i ty 
 in cor rup ti bil i ty per pen die u lar i ty 
 
 Words of eight syllables, accented on the sixth. 
 
 ? . 2 
 
 In com mens u ra bil i ty in com pre hen si bil i ty 
 
 in com mu ni ca bil ity un in tel li gi bil i ty 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 83 
 
 SECTION XLI. 
 
 Accidents and dangerous practices of children: 
 illustrated by Pictures. 
 
 Many of the accidents of childhood, and the 
 dangerous practices to which children are ex- 
 posed, might be prevented by timely instruction. 
 
 Here are some pictures which represent some 
 of the improper practices, in which children fre- 
 quently indulge themselves. 
 
 And first, is a representation of a number of 
 boys engaged in 
 
 CLIMBING TREES. 
 
 This is a very dangerous practice ; the boughs 
 often break, or they miss their hold, when down 
 they fall, and often break their bones, and some- 
 times their necks. 
 
 The little boy who is falling from this tree, 
 has been robbing a poor little bird of her nest. 
 The limb to which he held has broke, and he 
 
84 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 will get a terrible fall ; and thus get severely 
 punished for his wickedness. 
 
 His little sister who is standing near by, cries 
 out, " O my poor brother ! I fear he will be 
 killed by the fall." 
 
 In the next picture, you see a little boy who 
 is in great danger of being drowned, while 
 
 BATHING. 
 
 The other little boys are very much alarmed, 
 and are trying to assist him. 
 
 Many children are drowned every year, from 
 not being sensible of the danger of water. They 
 go into ponds and rivers without knowing their 
 depth, and by one fatal step, they sink, never to 
 
 rise again 
 
 CD 
 
 Children should never bathe, except in baths 
 made for that purpose, or when attended by 
 those who can help them if necessary. 
 
 We now come to some very bad boys, who 
 are engaged in 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 85 
 
 FIGHTING AND THROWING STONES. 
 
 Throwing stones is a very bad practice for 
 children. They not only get hurt, hut sometimes 
 have an eye put out, which disfigures them for life. 
 
 See these two naughty boys engaged in fight- 
 ing! O how disgraceful! I dare say, when they 
 go home, their parents will punish them severely. 
 
 These are all bad boys : their conduct is not 
 only shameful, but they should be shunned by all 
 good children. 
 
 We hope, dear children that you will never 
 grieve your parents or fri nds by such improper 
 conduct. 
 
 Always love and obey your parents, and do 
 every thing you can to make them happy. Love 
 your brothers and sisters, and be kind to them. 
 
 When at school, obey your teacher. Always 
 speak the truth ; and never do any thing to in- 
 jure others. 
 
 Above all, you must love your Creator, and 
 obey his commands. He knows all your thoughts, 
 
86 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 hears all your words, and sees every thing you do- 
 
 He takes care of the great family of all the 
 earth, and upholds them by his mighty power. 
 
 He made us, and has preserved us ever since 
 we had existence. 
 
 He created the world, and ail things here on 
 earth, for our comfort, support and happiness. 
 
 He sees and knows all things that have been 
 done, and all that ever will be done. 
 
 People could not live, if He was not every 
 where to keep them alive. 
 
 If you wish to do that which is pleasing in the 
 sight of your Creator, you must obey these in- 
 structions, and avoid all improper conduct. 
 
 In the next place we come to some careless 
 little boys and girls, who are 
 
 PLAYING WITH GUNS AND KNIVES. 
 
 Look at this little boy with a sharp knife ! 
 While whittling, the knife slipped and cut a gash 
 in his hand. See how it bleeds ! 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 97 
 
 1 
 
 It is dangerous for young children to play with 
 knives ; bad wounds are often the consequence. 
 
 Children should never meddle with guns. 
 Here we see a little boy shooting his sister 
 dead ; an accident which has occurred for want 
 of proper warning. 
 
 No child should ever, on any account, present 
 a gun or pistol at another. 
 
 We next come to the picture of a careless 
 little girl, who has been 
 
 DRINKING FROM A HOT TEA-POT. 
 
 One of these little girls, who can just reach 
 the top of the table, has been drinking from the 
 spout of a tea-pot : by which means her mouth 
 and throat have been badly scalded. 
 
 Children should bew T are of scalding water. 
 They should never play about it in a careless 
 manner ; for in so doing they are exposed to 
 great danger. 
 
 Hundreds of children have been scalded, and 
 died miserable deaths in a few hours after, which j 
 
88 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 a little warning, with proper care on their part, 
 might have prevented. 
 
 Here is one more picture, which represents 
 some thoughtless little girls, 
 
 FLAYING WITH FIRE AND CANDLES. 
 
 One of them has set the bed curtains on fire 
 with a candle ; and another her hair. 
 
 A third, in lighting paper in the fire to play 
 with, has set her clothes on fire. 
 
 O what a dreadful situation these poor little 
 girls are in! They are all in danger of being 
 burnt to death in the most cruel manner. 
 
 Learn from this, dear children, always to be 
 careful of fire. We often hear of little girls being 
 burnt to death, in the greatest agony, by their 
 clothes taking fire. 
 
 Children who wish to live long, and be happy, 
 must take warning, and endeavour to shun all 
 these bad practices. They must attend to the in- 
 structions of their kind teachers, and the advice 
 of their affectionate parents. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 89 
 
 SECTION XLII. 
 
 In the following section, w is pronounced after h though 
 written before it : thus lohale, what, are pronounced hwale, 
 liwai* 
 
 N. B— In this, and in the following sections, the accented syllables 
 are designated by the figures which are placed over them to represent 
 the sounds of the vowels. 
 
 12 12 
 
 Whale 
 
 whim 
 
 whee die 
 
 whip per 
 
 wheat 
 
 whin 
 
 whi ten 
 
 whip saw 
 
 wheeze 
 
 whip 
 
 white ness 
 
 whis ker 
 
 while 
 
 whisk 
 
 white wash 
 
 whis key 
 
 whilst 
 
 whist 
 
 whi ting 
 
 whis per 
 
 whine 
 
 whit 
 
 whi tish 
 
 whis t\e 
 
 white 
 
 whiz 
 
 whi ten er 
 
 whit tie 
 
 why 
 
 whur 
 
 2 
 
 whim si cal 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 wher ret 
 
 whis per er 
 
 whelp 
 
 wharf 
 
 wher ry 
 
 2 
 
 when 
 
 5 
 
 whet stone 
 
 where as 
 
 whence 
 
 what 
 
 whif fle 
 
 where at 
 
 which 
 
 9 
 
 whim per 
 
 where in 
 
 whiff 
 
 where 
 
 whim sey 
 
 2 
 
 whig 
 
 whey 
 
 whip lash 
 
 o ver whelm 
 
 
 NIGHT. 
 
 
 Now darkness 
 
 shades the distant hill, 
 
 The little birds 
 
 are hid and still, 
 
 
 Anc 
 
 [ we a quiet sleep may take, 
 
 
 For 
 
 our Creator is awake. 
 
 
 'Tis sweet, upon my little bed, 
 
 To think my Saviour guards my head, 
 
 And he a helpless child can keep, 
 Through all the silent hours of sleep. 
 
 * in pronouncing words of this class, the sound of h is sometimes 
 omitted: thus, white, wheel, are pronounced wile, weel, &c. which is at 
 corrupt pronunciation, and ought to be carefully avoided. i 
 
90 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 
 SECTION XLIII. 
 
 In the following section, g has 
 
 its hard sound before 
 
 
 e i and y. 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 Gear 
 
 gim let 
 
 for get 
 
 geese 
 
 giv er 
 
 for give 
 
 2 
 
 giz zard 
 
 mis give 
 
 get 
 
 hag gish 
 
 l 
 
 gift 
 
 jag gy 
 
 ea ger ly 
 
 gig 
 
 mug gy 
 
 ea ger ness 
 
 gild 
 
 quag gy 
 
 ? 
 
 gills 
 
 rag ged 
 
 gib ber ish 
 
 gimp 
 
 rig ging 
 
 gid di ly 
 
 give 
 
 rig gish 
 
 gid di ness 
 
 l 
 
 scrag ged 
 
 rag ged ness 
 
 ea ger 
 
 scrag gy 
 
 rug ged ly 
 
 gew gaw 
 
 shag ged 
 
 rug ged ness 
 
 ti ger 
 
 slug gish 
 
 scrag gi ness 
 
 2 
 
 snag ged 
 
 slug gish ness 
 
 brag ger 
 
 snag gy 
 
 wag ger y 
 
 bug gy 
 
 sprig gy 
 
 wag gish ness 
 
 crag ged 
 
 stag ger 
 
 5 
 
 crag gy 
 
 swag ger 
 
 fog gi ness 
 
 dag ger 
 
 wag gisli 
 
 log ger head 
 
 dig ger 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 dreg gy 
 
 au ger 
 
 be gin ner 
 
 drug gist 
 
 4 
 
 be gin ning 
 
 flaggy 
 
 tar get 
 
 for get ful 
 
 gib bous 
 
 5 
 
 for give ness 
 
 gid dy 
 
 boggy 
 
 2 
 
 gig gle 
 
 f °g gy 
 
 pet ti fog aer 
 
 gig let 
 
 hog gish 
 
 2 
 
 gil der 
 
 nog gin 
 
 for get ful ness 
 
 '■ — j — 
 
 "V i' i i inn II i I ii ailill 
 
 — T . 1ff ... rm _ w . TTTinffrinr Trm _ r . i 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 91 
 
 SECTION XLIV. 
 
 In the following section, g has its hard soun'l ; and n has 
 the sound of ng when it ends an accented syllable : thus, an- 
 ger, is pronounced ang-ger. 
 
 2 
 
 An ger 
 
 2 
 
 Ian guish 
 
 5 
 
 Ion ger 
 
 an gle 
 
 lin ger 
 
 stron ger 
 
 an gler 
 
 lin guist 
 
 stron gest 
 
 an gry 
 
 man g\e 
 
 2 
 
 an guish 
 
 min g\e 
 
 an gli cism 
 
 dan gig 
 
 san guine 
 
 an gu lar 
 
 fan g\e 
 
 shin g\e 
 
 sin gle ness 
 
 fin ger 
 hun ger 
 
 span gle 
 stran gle 
 
 sin gu lar 
 sin gu lar ly 
 
 hun gry 
 jin g\e 
 
 tan gle 
 tin g\e 
 
 2 
 
 dis tin guish 
 
 Ian guage 
 
 t#ran gle 
 
 en tan g\e 
 
 Ian guid 
 
 youn gest 
 
 ex tin guish 
 
 SECTION XLV. 
 
 In the following section, x, being followed by an accented 
 syllable beginning with a vowel, has the sound of gz ; thus, 
 ex-act, is pronounced egz-act. 
 
 2 3 I 
 
 Ex act ex alt lux u ri ous 
 
 ex emjpt ex or bi tant ux o ri ous 
 
 ex ert ex or di urn 2 
 
 ex ist i ex an i mate 
 
 ex ult anx i e ty ex ec u tive 
 
 ex act ly ex u be ranee ex ec u tor 
 
 ex am ine ex u be rant ex em pla ry 
 
 ex am pie lux u ri ance ex em pli fy 
 
 ex em plar lux u ri ant 5 
 
 ex is tence lux u ri ate ex on er ate 
 
92 TH 
 
 E PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 
 SECTION XLVI. 
 
 1 in the following 
 
 section, c has the sound of sh when followed 
 
 | by w, co j or ea, and the accent precedes : thus, gra-cious, is 
 
 p r on aim cc (1 gra-shus. 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 Gra ciovis 
 
 fe ro cious 
 
 au da cious ly 
 
 o cean 
 
 fu ga cious 
 
 yo ra cious ly 
 
 so cial 
 
 lo qua cious 
 
 2 
 
 spa cious 
 
 ra pa cious 
 
 co er cion 
 
 i 
 
 sa ga cious 
 
 pro vin cial 
 
 a tro cious 
 
 se qua cious 
 
 i 
 
 au da cious 
 
 se ta ceous 
 
 con tu ma cious 
 
 ca pa cious 
 
 te na cious 
 
 ef fi ca cious 
 
 ce ta ceous 
 
 vi va cious 
 
 in ca pa cious 
 
 j crus ta ceous vo ra cious 
 
 per spi ca cious 
 
 fal la cious 
 
 a tro cious 
 
 per ti na cious 
 
 j 
 
 SECTION XL VII. 
 
 In the following 
 
 ; section, c has the sound of sh when follow. 
 
 j ed by ia, le, or io, 
 
 and is pronounced as 
 
 if it was joined to the 
 
 i preceding syllable 
 
 : thus, pre-cious, spe 
 
 •cial, are pronounced 
 
 I presh-iis, speslual. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 | Pre cious 
 
 nia li cious 
 
 es pe cial ly 
 
 spe cial 
 
 mu si cian 
 
 ma li cious ly 
 
 vi cious 
 
 of fi cial 
 
 per ni cious ly 
 
 2 
 
 pa tri cian 
 
 suf fi cient ly 
 
 au spi cious 
 
 per ni cious 
 
 2 
 
 ca pri cious 
 
 phy si cian 
 
 ar ti fi cial 
 
 ef fi cient 
 
 suf ft cient 
 
 av a ri cious 
 
 ju di cial 
 
 sus pi cion 
 
 ben e fi cial 
 
 ju di cious 
 
 de fi cien cy 
 
 prej u di cial 
 
 ma gi cian 
 
 de li cious ly 
 
 su per fi cial 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 93 
 
 
 
 SECTION XLVIII. 
 
 
 
 lite 
 
 m m 
 
 
 uniir 
 
 jd 
 
 1 «!§* 
 
 1 H 
 
 Will IP less 
 
 111 
 
 11 
 
 JcSi 
 
 g^^^^^^^p^Wl^M 
 
 ^ir Iff ■ 
 
 
 
 Ull liit^aiiiiiiiBi^^B 
 
 George Washington and his Little Hatchet. 
 
 When George was about six years old, he 
 was made the wealthy master of a hatchet ! of 
 which, like most boys, he was immoderately fond ; 
 and was constantly going about, chopping every 
 thing that came in his way. 
 
 One day in the garden, where he had often 
 amused himself hacking the pea-bushes, he un- 
 luckily tried the edge of his hatchet on the body 
 of a beautiful young English cherry tree, which 
 he so much injured, that the tree never got the 
 better of it. 
 
 The next morning, his father, finding out what 
 had befallen his favourite tree, came into the 
 house, and asked for the author of the mischief; 
 declaring at the same time, that he would not 
 have taken five guineas for the tree. 
 
 Nobody could tell him any thing about it. 
 Presently George and his little hatchet made their 
 
94 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 appearance. " George," said his father, " do 
 you know who killed that beautiful little cherry 
 tree yonder in the garden ?" 
 
 This was a hard question ; and George stag- 
 gered under it for a moment ; but quickly recov- 
 ered himself, and looking at his father with the 
 sweet face of youth, brightened with the charm 
 of honesty, he bravely cried out, " I cannot tell 
 a lie Pa : vou know I cannot tell a lie. I did 
 it with my little hatchet." 
 
 " Run to my arms, my dearest boy," said his 
 father ; " you have paid me for my tree a thou- 
 sand times ; and I hope, my son, you will always 
 be hero enough to tell the truth." 
 
 SECTION XLXX. 
 Definitions of Arts and Sciences. 
 A Mechanic, is a person who has the knowledge 
 
 of some art. 
 A Farmer, is a person who tills the ground to 
 
 raise food for men and cattle. 
 A Blacksmith, is one who makes things of iron. 
 A Goldsmith, is one who works in gold and 
 
 silver. 
 A Cabinet Maker, is one who makes tables, 
 
 bureaus, and other furniture. 
 A Carpenter, is one who builds houses. 
 A Mason, is one who lays walls, and builds 
 
 brick or stone houses. 
 A Saddler, is one who makes saddles and har- 
 nesses. 
 A Cooper, is one who makes barrels, tubs and 
 
 pails. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 95 
 
 A Glazier, is one who sets glass in windows, 
 
 A Printer, is one who prints papers and books. 
 
 A Bookbinder, is one who puts covers on books. 
 
 A Barber, is one who shaves, and cuts hair. 
 
 A Brewer, is one who makes beer, 
 
 A Butcher, is one who kills and sells meat. 
 
 A Baker, is one who makes bread to sell. 
 
 A Magistrate,^ one chosen to govern the people. 
 
 A Legislator, is one who makes laws. 
 
 A Physician, is one who studies diseases and 
 
 medicine. 
 A Divine, is a minister of the Gospel. 
 
 In the following 
 by ia, ie, or ?'o, pre 
 pounced par-shal. 
 
 1 
 
 Pa tient 
 quo tient 
 
 2 
 cap tious 
 fac tious 
 fie tious 
 frac tious 
 nup tial 
 
 3 
 
 cau tious 
 
 SECTION L. 
 
 section, t has the sound of sh when followed 
 ceded by the accent: thus, par-tial, is pro- 
 
 par tial 
 par tial ly 
 
 l 
 fa ce tious 
 im pa tience 
 im pa tient 
 vex a tious 
 fa ce tious ness 
 im pa tient ly 
 vex a tious ness 
 
 con ten tious 
 ere den tial 
 es sen tial 
 in fee tious 
 li cen tious 
 po ten tial 
 pru den tial 
 sen ten tious 
 sub stan tial 
 li cen tious ness 
 
 In the following words, (and in all other cases,) where Hon, tian, 
 and tial, are immediately preceded by 5 or x, t has the sound of ch : 
 thus, bas-tion, is pronounced bas-chun. 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 Bas tion ad mix tion 
 
 fus tian ce les tial 
 
 ques tion am bus tion 
 
 com bus tion 
 di ges tion 
 sug ges tion 
 

 
 
 96 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 
 SECTION LI. 
 
 In the following section, t has the sound of sh, when follow- 
 
 ed by io ; and is 
 
 )ronounced as if joined to the preceding syJ. 
 
 lable : thus, ad-di-tion, is pronounced ad-dish-nn. 
 
 2 
 
 Ad di tion 
 
 4 
 pro pi tious 
 
 2 
 
 def i ni tion 
 
 am bi tion 
 
 se di tion 
 
 dis po si tion 
 
 am bi tious 
 
 se di tious 
 
 er u di tion 
 
 con di tion 
 
 vo li tion 
 
 ex pe di tion 
 
 con tri tion 
 
 2 
 
 ex po si tion 
 
 dis ere tion 
 
 ab o li tion 
 
 im po si tion 
 
 e di tion 
 
 ad mo ni tion 
 
 in qui si tion 
 
 fie ti tious 
 
 am mu ni tion 
 
 op po si tion 
 
 fru i tion 
 
 ap po si tion 
 
 prep o si tion 
 
 pe ti tion 
 
 com pe ti tion 
 
 pro hi bi tion 
 
 par ti tion 
 
 co a li tion 
 
 prop o si tion 
 
 po si tion 
 
 com po si tion 
 
 sup po si tion 
 I. 
 
 SECTION LI 
 
 In the following 
 
 section, th has its first or sharp sound, as 
 
 
 in think, thin. 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 E ther 
 
 an them 
 
 thun der 
 
 faith ful 
 
 dipA thong 
 
 tripA thong 
 
 faith less 
 
 health ful 
 
 wealth y 
 
 ze nith 
 
 health y 
 
 ap a thy 
 
 a the ism 
 
 meth od 
 
 ep i thet 
 
 a the ist 
 
 pan ther 
 
 leth ar gy 
 
 hy a cinth 
 
 sab bath 
 
 meth o dist 
 
 the a tre 
 
 thick ness 
 
 pen ny worth 
 
 the o rem 
 
 thim b\e 
 
 sym pa thize 
 
 the o rist 
 
 this t\e 
 
 sym pa thy 
 
 the o ry 
 
 thrif ty 
 
 syn the sis 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLINC 
 
 r-BOOK. 97 
 
 3 
 
 l 
 
 2 
 
 au thor 
 
 de throne 
 
 pa ren the sis 
 
 thorn y 
 
 en throne 
 
 pa thet i cal 
 
 thought ful 
 
 north east 
 
 5 
 
 or tho dox 
 
 south east 
 
 au thor i ty 
 
 5 
 
 ca the dral 
 
 ca thol i cism 
 
 thros t\e 
 
 un faith ful 
 
 ca thol i con 
 
 throt t\e 
 
 2 
 
 li thog ra phy 
 
 moth y 
 
 here with 
 
 li thot o my 
 
 8 
 
 north west 
 
 my thol o f\y 
 
 month ly 
 
 south west 
 
 the oc ra cy 
 
 thir teen 
 
 me.theg lin 
 
 the ol o gy 
 
 thir ty 
 
 un thrifty 
 
 ther mom e ter 
 
 thor ough 
 
 a nath e ma 
 
 a poth e ca ry 
 
 worth less 
 
 an tip a thy 
 
 2 
 
 cu 
 
 au then ti cate 
 
 a rith met i cal 
 
 thou sand 
 
 mis an thro py 
 
 a the is ti cal 
 
 SECTION LII 
 
 In the following 
 
 section, th has its second or flat sound, 
 
 
 as in tlie, iliein. 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 Cloth in£ 
 
 neth er 
 
 oth er 
 
 ei ther 
 
 rath er 
 
 smoth er 
 
 hea then 
 
 south ern 
 
 w 7 or thy 
 
 loath some 
 
 teth er 
 
 wor thi ly 
 
 nef ther 
 
 thith er 
 
 wor thi ness 
 
 2 
 
 breth ren 
 
 4 
 
 far ther 
 
 i 
 al though 
 
 fath om 
 
 far thing 
 
 be neath 
 
 feath er 
 
 fa ther 
 
 be queath 
 
 gath er 
 
 fa ther ly 
 
 w r ith hold 
 
 hith er 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 lath er 
 
 broth er 
 
 them selves 
 
 leath er 
 
 moth er 
 
 with stand 
 
98 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LIV. 
 Definition of Common terms. 
 
 Charles, we shall now explain some words and 
 phrases to you, and then ask some questions 
 about them, to see if you understand the mean- 
 ing of them. 
 
 Can you tell the difference between a divine 
 agent, and a human agent? God is a divine agent; 
 men are human agents. 
 
 Some things are the works of nature, others 
 the works of art. The sun, moon, and stars; 
 the world, the animals, and trees, are the works 
 of nature. They are called the works of nature 
 because God created them, or made them grow. 
 
 The works of art, are things made by men. 
 Houses, fences, tables, chairs, shoes, and hats, 
 are works of art. 
 
 There are likewise works of instinct i as a bird's 
 nest, a spider's web, and a honey-comb. These 
 are called works of instinct, because animals have 
 not understanding like men, but are directed by 
 instinctive principles. 
 
 Some things are animate, others are inanimate* 
 Horses, cows, dogs, and birds, are animate. They 
 are called animate, because they have the sense 
 of seeing, hearing, smelling, tasting, and feeling. 
 
 Those things which cannot see, hear, smell, 
 taste, nor feel, are called inanimate ; as stones, 
 wood, and water. 
 
 Some things have animal life, others have vege- 
 table life. Mankind, beasts, insects, birds, and 
 fishes, have animal life. Grass, flowers, shrubs, 
 and trees, have vegetable life. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 99 
 
 Some animals are domestic, others are wild. 
 The horse, cow, sheep, dog, cat, and hen, are 
 domestic animals. The bear, wolf, fox, squirrel, 
 and hawk, are wild animals. 
 
 A beast of prey, is an animal that devours other 
 animals ; as a lion, leopard, panther, and tiger. 
 
 Animals that eat flesh, such as the dog, wolf, 
 and lion, are called carnivorous. 
 
 Animals that feed on grass, such as the horse, 
 cow, and sheep, are called graminivorous. 
 
 Animals that live in flocks or herds, as sheep, 
 geese, and bees, are called gregarious. 
 
 It is said of a man who cannot see — he is blind. 
 
 If he cannot hear — he is deaf. 
 
 If he cannot speak — he is dumb. 
 
 If he cannot move — he is motionless. 
 
 If he cannot feel — he is senseless. 
 
 Questions upon the preceding section. 
 
 Who is a divine agent ? Who ai e human agents ? What 
 things are called the works of nature ? Why do you call these 
 the works of nature ? What are the works of art ? Why are 
 they called the works of art ? What are the works of instinct? 
 Why are they called works of instinct ? Can you name some 
 things that are animate? Why do you call them animate ? 
 What things are called inanimate ? Why ? What things have 
 animal life ? What have vegetable life ? What animals are 
 domestic ? What animals are wild ? What is a beast of prey ? 
 What are carnivorous animals ? What are graminivorous ? 
 What are gregarious ? What is said of a man who cannot see ? 
 What, if he cannot hear ? What, if he cannot speak ? What, 
 if he cannot move? What, if he cannot feel ? 
 
 SELECT SENTENCES. 
 
 Our best friends are those who tell us of our 
 faults, and teach us how to correct them. 
 
 Good or bad habits formed in youth, general- 
 y go with us through life. 
 
J 00 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 1 
 
 com mun ion 
 
 SECTION LV. 
 
 In the following section, i before a vowel, has the sound of 
 y ; thus, al-ien, fil-ial, are pronounced ale-yen, jil-yaL 
 
 2 
 
 pill ion 
 pin ion 
 runn ion 
 scull ion 
 trill ion 
 triv ial 
 val iant 
 brill ian cy 
 val iant ly 
 
 3 
 
 warr iour 
 
 l 
 
 Al ien 
 court ier 
 seign ior 
 pav ier 
 al ien ate 
 
 ba^n io 
 Well ium 
 bil ious 
 bill iards 
 brill iant 
 cull ion 
 filial 
 gall iard 
 mill ion 
 min ion 
 
 coll ier 
 pon iard 
 
 8 
 
 on ion 
 
 ci vil ian 
 com pan ion 
 con viv ial 
 fa mil iar 
 me dall ion 
 mo dill ion 
 o pin ion 
 pa vil ion 
 pos till ion 
 punc til ious 
 ras call ion 
 re bell ion 
 re bell ious 
 ver mil ion 
 
 SECTION LVI. 
 
 In the following section, s and z, have the sound of zh 3 when 
 preceded by a vowel and followed by ?', or u : thus, meas-ure, 
 vis-ion, are pronounced mezh-ure, vizh-un. 
 
 1 
 
 A zure 
 bra sier 
 fu sion 
 gla zier 
 o sier 
 ra sure 
 u su ry 
 
 meas urj 
 
 treas lire 
 vis ion 
 
 l 
 ad he sion 
 al lu sion 
 com po sure 
 con clu sion 
 de lu sion 
 dif fu sion 
 
 ef lu sion 
 en clo sure 
 e ro sion 
 e va sion 
 ex clu sion 
 ex plo sion 
 ex po sure 
 in fu sion 
 in va sion 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 101 
 
 1 
 oc ca sion 
 per sua sion 
 pro fu sion 
 
 2 
 
 al lis ion 
 de cis ion 
 
 de ris ion 
 di vis ion 
 in cis ion 
 pre cis ion 
 re cis ion 
 re vis ion 
 
 cas u al ty 
 vis ion a ry 
 
 l 
 oc ca sion al 
 un u su al 
 oc ca sion al ly 
 
 SECTION LVIL 
 
 In the following section, s when followed by u, has the sound 
 of sh ; thus, sure, is pronounced shure. 
 
 Sure 
 
 cen sur er 
 
 as su ranee 
 
 sure ly 
 
 is sue less 
 
 as su rer 
 
 sure ness 
 
 sen su al 
 
 en su ranee 
 
 sure ty 
 
 cen su ra ble 
 
 en su rer 
 
 2 
 
 sen su al ist 
 
 as su red ly 
 
 cen sure 
 
 sen su al ize 
 
 2 
 
 fis sure 
 
 sen su al ly 
 
 com pres sure 
 
 is sue 
 
 l 
 
 ]m pres sure 
 
 pres sure 
 
 as sure 
 
 2 
 
 ten sure 
 
 en sure 
 
 sen su al i ty 
 
 SECTION LVIII. 
 
 [n the following section, ch has the sound of sh ; thus, chaise, 
 is pronounced shaze. 
 
 Chaise 
 
 2 
 
 tren chant 
 
 4 
 
 char la tan 
 
 l 
 cha made 
 
 cham p&ign 
 chi cane 
 chi ca ner 
 chi ca ner y 
 
 10 
 
 cha grin 
 ma chine 
 
 10 
 
 ma chin er y 
 
 l 
 chan de Ker 
 chev a Ker 
 deb au chee 
 
 10 
 
 cap u chin 
 
102 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LIX. 
 
 In the following section, h is silent when preceded by c, 
 which has the sound of k. 
 
 1 
 
 AcAe 
 cAyle 
 scheme 
 cAa os 
 cAo ral 
 cAo rus 
 e pocA 
 li lacA 
 o cAre 
 
 te trarcA 
 
 2 
 cAasm 
 cArism 
 an arcA 
 an cAor 
 cAris^ en 
 christ mas 
 dis ticA 
 ecA o 
 pas cAal 
 
 3 
 
 chord 
 
 4 
 
 ar chives 
 
 5 
 
 cAol er 
 
 mon arcA 
 scAol ar 
 
 6 
 
 scAool 
 
 8 
 
 stom acA 
 
 l 
 en cAa rist 
 hi e rarcA 
 pa tri arcA 
 hi e rar chj 
 
 2 
 
 an ar chy 
 an cAor age 
 bac cAa nals 
 cat e chise 
 cat e cAism 
 cat e cAist 
 cAam o mile 
 cAar ac ter 
 cAris£ en dom 
 cArys a lis 
 cArys o lite 
 mecA an ism 
 micA ae\ mas 
 sac cAa rine 
 
 sep ul cAre 
 mel an cAol y 
 
 3 
 
 or cAes tre 
 
 4 
 
 ar cAe type 
 ar cAi tect 
 harp si cAord 
 
 5 
 
 cAron i cal 
 cAron i cle 
 mon ar cAy 
 
 ol i gar cAy 
 
 l 
 arcA an gel 
 cAi me ra 
 mos cAe to 
 
 2 
 
 cAi mer i cal 
 me cAan i cal 
 cAi mer i cal ly 
 me cAan i cal ly 
 
 5 
 
 cAi rog ra phy 
 cAronol o ger 
 cAro nol o gy 
 
 Reflection. 
 
 How pleasant it is, at the close of the day, 
 
 No foliies to have to repent ! 
 But reflect on the past, and be able to say, 
 
 M) time has been properly spent. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 103 
 
 SECTION LX. 
 
 THE HONEY BEE. 
 
 Here, Charles, is another picture. We shall now 
 tell you something about the bees. Here is a represen- 
 tation of a bee-hive, where they make their honey. 
 Near the hive is some honey-comb ; and just above the 
 comb are some bees ; the queen, the drone, and the 
 common honey-bee. 
 
 On the other side of the hive is a boy with a book in 
 his hand, who is looking to see the little bees at work, 
 making honey. The bee is a noble pattern of skill and 
 industry, to which we are indebted for one of the most 
 palatable and wholesome sweets that nature affords. 
 
 See how active they are in going in and out the 
 hive ; and this busy life never ceases during the season 
 in which it is proper for them to lay in food, and to store 
 their cells for winter. 
 
 If we may believe what writers say of them, they all 
 have their seperate offices and labours, as if they were 
 under the strictest discipline. When the season arrives 
 in which they begin to build their comb, they divide 
 themselves into distinct bands for service. 
 
104 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 1 
 
 One party, like servants in a family, is wholly taken 
 up in providing food for those which are employed in 
 the work. Another party is engaged in flying abroad 
 into the fields and gardens, to cull the sweets of flowers, 
 from which they make their wax and honey. A third 
 is employed in the hive, to receive what the former 
 brings home, and to work it up into the different cells. 
 
 And what is remarkable, though all are thus engaged, 
 and every one so busy, yet none of them breaks in upon 
 another's province, or interrupts him in his work, so as 
 to make disorder in the hive. 
 
 One thing more we may notice concerning these lit tie 
 creatures, because we may learn from it a very useful 
 lesson ; and that is their cleanliness ; for if by accident 
 any thing oiTensive gets into their hive, they have no 
 rest until it is removed. 
 
 For this purpose, if one bee has not power to do it, 
 others assist ; and if it should prove too big or too heavy 
 for their united efforts to accomplish, they then contrive 
 to get it into one corner, and there cover it over with 
 a kind of glue, somewhat like their honey ; so that no 
 smell or offence may arise from it to hurt them. 
 
 Thus you see how the little bees improve their time : 
 they labour hard to gather honey during the summer, 
 and lay up a store for winter, when the herbs and flow- 
 ers are dead, and the weather cold and dreary. 
 
 And I hope, dear children, that you will employ your 
 time well, like the little busy bee, and never idle away 
 your hours in the streets or fields, but improve your 
 time in useful study while you are young, and not neg- 
 lect what will be for your good all your life-time. 
 
 And like that busy insect, we should learn to make 
 all things turn to our use, and be of service to us. 
 There is nothing so small or minute but it may be made 
 of use ; nothing so bad in nature but that we may draw 
 from it some profit, or lesson to instruct us ; and by 
 choosing the good, and turning from evil, we may pur- 
 chase to ourselves peace here, and the hopes of a bright- 
 er reward in a future state. 
 
 j 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 105 
 
 How doth the little busy bee 
 
 Improve each shining hour$ 
 And gather honey all the day* 
 
 From every opening flower ! 
 
 How skilfully she builds her cell ! 
 
 How neat she spreads the wax ! 
 And labours hard to store it well* 
 
 With the sweet food she makes* 
 
 In works of labour, or of skill, 
 
 I would be busy too ; 
 For Satan finds some mischief still* 
 
 For idle hands to do* 
 
 In books, or work, or healthful play, 
 
 Let my first years be past; 
 That I may give for every day 
 
 Some good account at last. 
 
 SECTION LXL 
 
 Description of various causes of Death. 
 
 Death is ceasing to live. Some of the'things which 
 occasion death, are sickness, fire, water, smoke, cold, 
 hunger, intemperance, passion, and violence, 
 
 When death is occasioned by sickness, it is called a 
 natural death. 
 
 When by fire, it is called burning. 
 
 When by water, it is called drowning. 
 
 When by the heat of liquids, it is called scalding* 
 
 When by bad air or smoke, it is called suffocating. 
 
 When by cold, it is called freezing. 
 
 When by hunger, it is called starving. 
 
 When one is killed by another without design, it is 
 called manslaughter. 
 
 When by violence, it is called murder. 
 
 There are several kinds of murder ; when one is mur- 
 dered by his own child, it is called parricide. 
 
 When by a brother, it is called fratricide. 
 
( ^afe^Tt^ififlggi^^ 
 
 106 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 When ah infant is murdered* it is called infanticide. 
 When a king is murdered, it is called regicide. 
 When one kills himself, it is called suicide, 
 
 Questions on the preceding Section* 
 
 What is deaths What are some of the things which occasion 
 death 1 When death is occasioned by sickness* what is it called 1 
 When by fire, what? When by water* what? When by heat of 
 liquids* What 1 When by bad air or smoke* what 1 When by cold, 
 What? When by hunger, what] When one is killed by another, 
 without design* what is it called % When by violence, what 1 When 
 one is murdered by his own child* what is it called? When by a broth- 
 er* what 1 When an infant is murdered* what is it called 1 When a 
 king* What 1 When one kills himself, what is it called ] 
 
 SECTION LXII. 
 
 Words in which g and c are soft, like j and $, at the end 
 of accented syllables ; or, in which the accented syllables end 
 with a short vowel, followed by g and c soft. Thus, frig-id 9 
 ac-id, otffi-gid, a-tid, are pronounced, frij-id, as-id. 
 
 Teachers differ in opinion as to the best method of dividing this 
 class of words : some wish to have the accented syllables end with g 
 and c according to the division under the first example ; others wish 
 to have the accented syllables terminate with a short vowel, accord- 
 ing to the division under the second example. The words are there- 
 fore divided both ways ; the orthography and pronunciation being the 
 same, that each one may have the privilege of teaching according to 
 his own notions of division. 
 
 EXAMPLE I. 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 Dig it leg i ble veg e tate 
 
 frag We leg is late vig il ance 
 
 frig id mag i cal vig il ant 
 
 leg er mag is trate 2 
 
 pag eant pag eant ry re lig ion 
 
 pig eon reg i cide re lig ious 
 
 rig id reg i men pro dig ions 
 
 vig il reg i ment o rig i nal . 
 
 ag i tate reg is ter 2 
 
 flag e let trag e dy ac id 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK, 
 
 107 
 
 plac id 
 tac it 
 ac id ness 
 dec i mal 
 lac er ate 
 mac er ate 
 pac i fy 
 prec e dent 
 prec i pice 
 rec i pe 
 spec i men 
 nee es sa ry 
 
 5 
 
 doc He 
 
 2 
 
 Di git 
 
 fra gile 
 fri gid 
 le ger 
 pa geant 
 pi geon 
 ri gid 
 vi gil 
 a gi tate 
 fla ge let 
 le gi ble 
 le gis late 
 ma gi cal 
 ma gis trate 
 pa geant ry 
 re gi cide 
 re gi men 
 
 proc ess 
 
 2 
 
 e lie it 
 ex plic it 
 il lie it 
 im plic it 
 ca pac i tate 
 ca pac i ty 
 du plic i ty 
 fe lie i ty 
 lo quae i ty 
 men dac i ty 
 ra pac i ty 
 rus tic i ty 
 
 EXAMPLE He 
 
 2 
 
 re gi ment 
 re gis ter 
 tra ge dy 
 ve ge tate 
 vi gil ance 
 vi gil ant 
 
 2 
 
 re li gion 
 re li gious 
 pro di gious 
 o ri gi nal 
 
 2 
 
 a cid 
 pla cid 
 ta cit 
 a cid ness 
 de ci mal 
 
 sa gac i ty 
 sim plic i ty 
 ve rac i ty 
 vi vac i ty 
 
 5 
 
 a troc i ty 
 fe roc i ty 
 ve loc i ty 
 
 2 
 
 au then tic i ty 
 du o dec i mo 
 ec cen trie i ty 
 e las tic i ty 
 e lee trie i ty 
 
 la cer ate 
 ma cer ate 
 pa ci fy 
 pre ce dent 
 pre ci pice 
 re ci pe 
 spe ci men 
 ne ces sa ry 
 
 5 
 
 do cile 
 
 pro cess 
 
 2 
 
 e li cit 
 ex pli cit 
 il li cit 
 im pli cit 
 ca pa ci tate 
 
108 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 2 2 5 
 
 ca pa ci ty sa ga ci ty ve lo ci ty 
 
 du pli ci ty sim pli ci ty 2 
 
 fe li ci ty ve ra ci ty au then ti ci ty 
 
 lo qua ci ty vi va ci ty du o de ci mo 
 
 men da ci ty 5 ec cen tri ci ty 
 
 ra pa ci ty a tro ci ty e las ti ci ty 
 
 rus ti ci ty fe ro ci ty e lee tri ci ty 
 
 SECTION LXIII. 
 
 In the following words, ti and ci have the sound of she when 
 followed by a vowel and the accent precedes : thus, sa.'-ti-ate, 
 gla'-ci-ate, are pronounced, sa' -she-ate, gla' -she-ate* 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 Sa ti ate ap pre ci a ting in sa ti able ness 
 
 gla ci ate as so ci a ting 2 
 
 i con so ci a ting an nun ci ate 
 
 ap pre ci ate dis so ci a ting e nun ci ate 
 
 as so ci ate e ma ci a ting li cen ti ate 
 
 con so ci ate ex pa ti a ting sub stan ti ate 
 
 ex pa ti ate in gra ti a ting an nun ci a ting 
 
 dis so ci ate ne go ti a ting e nun ci a ting 
 
 in sa ti ate fi du ci a ry e nun ci a tive 
 
 e ma ci ate in sa ti a b\e sub stanti a ting 
 
 in gra ti ate in sa ti a bly 1 
 
 ne go ti ate ne go ti a tor brag ga do ci o 
 
 In the following words, ti has the sound of she when follow- 
 ed by a vowel ; and the preceding syllable is pronounced as 
 if it ended with sh : thus vi'-ti-ate, is pronounced, vish'-e-ate. 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 Vi ti ate no vi ti ate pro pi ti a to ry 
 
 vi ti a ting pro pi ti ate 1 
 
 vi ti a ted pro pi ti a ting vi ti a tion 
 
 2 pro pi ti a ted 1 
 
 in i ti ate pro pi ti a tor in i ti a tion 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 109 
 
 SECTION LXIV. 
 
 In the following words, u, when preceded by an accented 
 syllable, has the sound of yu. 
 
 The pronunciation of this class of words, is not uniformly settled. 
 That formerly adopted, to a great extent, was to pronounce them as 
 if written na-ter, naUer-al : a more common enunciation at present, is 
 that of na'-tshure, natslV -u-ral : but the true pronunciation, seems to be 
 that of giving all the letters their proper sound ; as if written nate'- 
 yure, not' -iju-ral. This pronunciation has been sanctioned by several 
 lexicographers, and is now adopted by many of our best speakers. It 
 is by far the most elegant, and analogical. The u in these words is 
 not sounded as long, or as short, as when under the accent ; the true 
 pronunciation seems to lie between both ; which may be termed the 
 unaccented long u.* 
 
 3 
 
 fort une 
 tort ure 
 
 act u al 
 act u ate 
 
 ad vent ure 
 en rapt ure 
 
 Creat ure 
 feat ure 
 nat ure 
 
 2 
 
 capt ure 
 
 cult ure 
 
 fixt ure 
 
 gest ure 
 
 mixt ure 
 
 nurt ure 
 
 past ure 
 
 pict ure 
 
 rapt ure 
 
 rupt ure 
 
 script ure 
 
 stat ue 
 
 stat ure 
 
 stat ute 
 
 struct ure 
 
 vent ure 
 
 vest ure 
 
 vult ure 
 
 * In teaching this section, if any wish to give t the sound of tsh, they 
 can adopt this pronunciation without any inconvenience. 
 
 10 
 
 cent u ry 
 nat u ral 
 pet u lance 
 pet u lant 
 rapt ur ous 
 script u ral 
 vent ur ous 
 act u al ly 
 nat u ral ist 
 nat u ral ize 
 nat u ral ly 
 stat u a ry 
 sum^t u a ry 
 tit u la ry 
 
 3 
 
 fort u nate 
 fort u nate ly 
 
 in dent ure 
 ac cent u ate 
 ad vent ur er 
 ad vent ur ous 
 con grat u late 
 con stit u ent 
 ef feet u al 
 ha bit u al 
 im pet u ous 
 in fat u ate 
 per pet u al 
 per pet u ate 
 tu mult u ous 
 un nat u ral 
 vo lupt u ous 
 ef feet u al ly 
 ha bit u al ly 
 per pet u al ly 
 
 2 
 
 re ca pit u late 
 
110 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LXV. 
 
 Words ending in ic or ick. 
 
 The orthography of this class of words is not entirely settled. In 
 words of one syllable, when this termination is preceded by i, and in 
 all words when preceded by any other vowel, the k is almost uniform- 
 ly annexed : but in words of more than one syllable, when this termi- 
 nation is preceded by i, the most common practice is to omit the k. 
 The dictionaries mostly used at present, which are those of Dr. Web- 
 ster and Mr. Walker, disagree in this termination ; as will be seen 
 by the following words.* 
 
 Webster. Walker 
 
 1 1 
 
 Cu bic cu bick 
 
 mu sic mu sick 
 
 2 2 
 
 crit ic crit ick 
 
 mys tic rnys tick 
 
 phihis ic phihis ick 
 
 rus tic rus tick 
 
 com ic 
 op tic 
 top ic 
 
 com ick 
 op tick 
 top ick 
 
 bo tan ic bo tan ick 
 
 Webster. Walker. 
 
 2 2 
 
 do mes tic do mes tick 
 
 dra mat ic dra mat ick 
 
 em pir ic em pir ick 
 
 fa nat ic fa nat ick 
 
 fo ren sic fo ren sick 
 
 in trin sic in trin sick 
 
 mag net ic mag net ick 
 
 ma jes tic ma jes tick 
 
 or gan ic or gan ick 
 
 pa cif ic pa cif ick 
 
 pro Jif ic pro lif ick 
 
 pro phet ic pro phet ick 
 
 Words ending in or, or our. 
 The number of words in the language, with this termination, is 
 about three hundred. These, with the exception of about forty or 
 fifty, are uniformly written without the u; as author, actor, doctor, 
 major, sailor, tailor, tutor, &c. In the following list, the most common 
 practice of our best writers, is, to retain the u ; although some exclude 
 it altogether. 
 
 Webster. Walker. 
 
 1 1 
 
 fa vor foi mour 
 
 fla vor la bour 
 
 Walker. 
 
 1 
 
 Fa vour 
 fla vour 
 
 Webster. 
 
 1 
 
 hn mor 
 la bor 
 
 * The final k has been retained in the dictionaries of Johnson, Sheri- 
 dtm, Walker, Jones, and Jameson : but it has been omitted in the dic- 
 tionaries of Martin, Ash, Fennmg, Entick, Browne, Barclay, Dyche, 
 (17th edition) Scott, Perry, Buchanan, Macredie, Webster, Maunder, 
 and Worcester. 
 
Jl 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK 
 
 111 
 
 I Walker, 
 
 Webster* Walker* 
 
 Webster* 
 
 1 
 
 1 2 
 
 2 
 
 o dour 
 
 o dor 
 
 val our 
 
 val or 
 
 ru mour 
 
 ru mor 
 
 vig our 
 
 vig or 
 
 sa vour 
 
 sa vor 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 sav iour* 
 
 sav ior* 
 
 ar bour 
 
 ar bor 
 
 tu mour 
 
 tu mor 
 
 ar dour 
 
 ar dor 
 
 
 
 ar mour 
 
 ar mor 
 
 va pour 
 
 2 
 
 va por 
 
 2 
 
 har bour 
 
 har bor 
 
 can dour 
 
 can dor 
 
 par lour 
 
 par lor 
 
 clam our 
 
 clam or 
 
 5 
 
 Aon our 
 
 5 
 
 hon or 
 
 rig our 
 
 rig or 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 splen dom 
 
 f splen dor 
 
 col our 
 
 col or 
 
 SECTION LXVL 
 
 Difficult an 
 
 d irregular words, which do not belong to the 
 
 preceding sections ; with the pronunciation opposite each word. 
 
 Written* 
 
 Pronounced, Written. 
 
 Pronounced. 
 2 
 flam boze 
 
 Ewe 
 
 j 
 
 flam beaux 
 
 
 2 
 
 hie cough 
 
 hik kup 
 
 been 
 
 bin 
 
 nepli ew 
 
 nev vu 
 
 once 
 
 wuns 
 
 pret ty 
 
 prit ty 
 
 one 
 
 wun 
 
 saf fron 
 
 saf furn 
 
 says 
 
 sez 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 6 
 
 cou rier 
 
 koo reer 
 
 rouge 
 
 roozh 
 
 
 1 
 
 sous 
 
 soo 
 
 main tain 
 
 men tane 
 
 
 1 
 
 suf fice 
 
 suf fize 
 
 a pron 
 
 a purn 
 
 
 2 
 
 haut boy 
 
 ho boy 
 
 a gain 
 
 a gen 
 
 i ron 
 
 i urn 
 
 a gainst 
 
 a genst 
 
 i sland 
 
 i land 
 
 dis cern 
 
 diz zern 
 
 puis ne 
 
 pu ne 
 
 
 2 
 
 vis count 
 
 vi kount 
 
 and i ron 
 
 and i urn 
 
 
 2 
 
 grid i ron 
 
 grid i urn 
 
 anx ious 
 
 angk shus 
 
 hal cy on 
 
 hal she un 
 
 breech es 
 
 brich iz 
 
 sac ri fice 
 
 sak kre fize 
 
 busi ness 
 
 biz nes 
 
 
 3 
 
 cob nel 
 
 kur nel 
 
 nau se ate 
 
 naw she ate 
 
 christ ian 
 
 krist yun 
 
 
 2 
 
 eng lish 
 
 ing glish 
 
 dis cern ment 
 
 diz zern ment 
 
 , flam beau 
 
 flam bo 
 
 port man teau 
 
 port man to 
 
 L 
 
 * i like y 
 
 1 
 
^-■•'^•'•^irriiriwraai^^^^ 
 
 112 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LXVIL 
 
 Evening* 
 
 The day declines ; the sinking sun 
 Hastes down the redd'ning skies 3 
 
 The hills receive his last shot ray, 
 Then hide him from our eyes. 
 
 And now still night her empire spreads 
 
 In silence far and near ; 
 No sound is heard, except the breeze? 
 
 That lulls the listening ear« 
 
 The sparkling stars in order rise, 
 And spread the vast profound ; 
 
 The moon next shows her silver face? 
 And lightens all around. 
 
 While thus I view these pleasing scenes? 
 
 Which strike my ravished sight? 
 O may I not forgetful be, 
 
 Of him who made the night. 
 
 SECTION LXVIIL 
 Morning. 
 
 The morning dawns ; the rising sun 
 
 Strews blushes o'er the sky ; 
 Men to their several callings run? 
 
 To their's all creatures hie. 
 
 The lark with her enliv'ning note? 
 
 Soars upward, as she sings ; 
 The warbling goldfinch swells his throat, 
 
 And spreads his gaudy wings. 
 
 The gen'rous cow her treasure yields? 
 
 The milk-maid's pail to fill ; 
 The lab'ring horse stalks to the fields? 
 
 The fruitful earth to till. 
 
 In every landscape there is seen? 
 
 Divine, creative power ; 
 Else what could clothe the fields with green, 
 
 Or form the od'rous flower ? 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 113 
 
 SECTION LXIX. 
 
 Creative Power. 
 
 God made the sun, and gave him light; 
 He made the moon to shine by night ; 
 He placed the brilliant stars on high. 
 And leads them through the midnight sky. 
 
 He made the earth in order stand, 
 He made the ocean and the land ; 
 He made the hills their places know, 
 And gentle rivers round them flow. 
 
 He made the forest, and sustains 
 The grass that clothes the fields and plains ; 
 He sends from heaven the summer showers, 
 And makes the meadows bright with flowers. 
 
 He called all beings into birth 
 That crowd the ocean, air, and earth ; 
 And all in Heaven and earth proclaim 
 The glory of his holy name. 
 
 SECTION LXX. 
 Goodness of the Creator. 
 God warmed with life our mortal parts, 
 He made the blood flow round our hearts ; 
 He made our pulse beat calm and still, 
 Our limbs move lightly at our will. 
 
 He made the eye that gazes round ; 
 The ear, alive to every sound; 
 The tongue, to make our wishes known ; 
 The soul, an image of his own. 
 
 In early youth he made us know 
 The way in which our feet should go ; 
 He gave us precepts, plain and few, 
 For all good deeds that we should do. 
 
 A thousand joys our God hath given, 
 Our peace on earth, our hopes of Heaven ; 
 And all our souls shall join to raise 
 An offering of immortal praise. 
 
 "~ — 10* ' ""' "' "■ ~" 
 
114 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LXXL 
 Reasons for not using Ardent Spirits. 
 
 1. Because it forms habits of intemperance ; which 
 produces poverty, and is an inlet to almost every vice that 
 can be named, 
 
 2. Because it gives a man red eyes, a bloated face, and 
 an empty purse. 
 
 3. Because it poisons the blood, and destroys the organs 
 of digestion. 
 
 4. Because it shortens more lives than famine, pesti- 
 lence, and the sword. 
 
 5. Because it corrupts both body and mind, and brings 
 down man to a level with the brute. 
 
 6. Because it destroys the purest principles of morali- 
 ty ; the noblest sentiments of honour, and the finest feel- 
 ings of humanity. 
 
 The Ten Commandments, versified. 
 
 1 . Thou shalt have no more Gods than me. 
 
 2. Before no idol bow thy knee. 
 
 3. Take not the name of God in vain ; 
 
 4. Wor dare the sabbath-day profane. 
 
 5. Give both thy parents honour due. 
 
 6. Take heed that thou no murder do. 
 
 7. Abstain from words and deeds unclean ; 
 
 8. KTor steal^though thou art poor and mean. 
 
 9. Jtfor make a wilful lie, nor love it : 
 
 10. What is thy neighbour's do not covet. 
 
 oxra saviouh's gox-den ruXiE- 
 &5e uotc to otue^ Kind and tzue / 
 
 *Jv4> uou/d nave otfoeu v-e to uoa; 
 
 <Jfond neitnet ao no^ d>au to men, 
 
 (: %L/nate'e^ uoa wou/a not tafoe aaa&n. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 115 
 
 SECTION LXXII. 
 
 FABLE* I. 
 The Wolf in disguise. 
 
 A Wolf, by frequent visits to a flock of sheep, began 
 to be extremely well known to them : he therefore 
 thought it expedient, for the more successfully carrying 
 on his depredations, to appear in a new character. 
 
 To this end he disguised himself in a shepherd's 
 dress ; and resting his fore feet upon a stick, which 
 served him by way of a crook, he softly made his ap- 
 proach towards the fold. 
 
 It happened that the shepherd and his dog were both 
 extended on the grass, asleep ; so that he would certain- 
 ly have succeeded in his project, had he not imprudently 
 attempted to imitate the shepherd's voice. 
 
 The horrid noise awakened them both ; when the 
 wolf, encumbered with his disguise, and finding it im- 
 possible to resist or flee, yielded up his life an easy prey 
 to the shepherd's dog". 
 
 MORAL. 
 
 There would be but little chance of detecting hypocrisy, were it 
 not always addicted to overact its part. 
 
 * Fables are fictions or feigned stories ; designed to amuse, and at the same 
 time to enforce moral instruction. 
 
116 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 FABLE II. 
 
 The Fox and the Raven. 
 
 A fox observing a raven perched on the branch of a 
 tree, with a fine piece of cheese in her mouth, immedi- 
 ately began to consider how he might possess so deli- 
 cious a morsel. 
 
 "Dear madam/' said he, "lam extremely glad to 
 have the pleasure of seeing you this morning ; your 
 beautiful shape and shining feathers are the delight of 
 my eyes." 
 
 " Would you condescend to favour me with a song ? 
 I doubt not but your voice is equal to the rest of your 
 accomplishments." 
 
 Deluded with this flattering speech, the transported 
 raven opened her mouth in order to give him a specimen 
 of her pipe, when down dropped the cheese, which the 
 fox instantly snatched up, and bore away in triumph ; 
 leaving the raven to lament her credulous vanity at her 
 leisure. 
 
 MORAL* 
 
 Wherever flattery gains admission, it seems to banish 
 common sense. 
 * Moral, is the meaning or instruction inculcated by a fable. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 117 
 
 FABLE III. 
 
 The Monkey and the Cats. 
 
 Two cats having stolen some cheese, could not agree 
 how to divide the prize. In order to settle the dispute, 
 they at last consented to refer the case to a monkey ; 
 who took upon himself the office of judge : and holding a 
 pair of scales, put a part into each scale. 
 
 " Let me see," said he, " this lump outweighs the 
 other ;" so he immediately bit off a considerable piece, 
 in order, as he said, to make them both equal. 
 
 The opposite scale had now become the heaviest, 
 which afforded the conscientious judge an additional rea- 
 son for a second mouthful. 
 
 " Hold, hold," said thecats, who began to fear the issue, 
 "give us our respective shares, and we shall be satisfied." 
 " If you are satisfied," said the monkey, " justice is not ; 
 a case of this nature is by no means so soon determined." 
 
 The poor cats seeing their cheese so much diminished, 
 entreated him to give himself no more trouble, but deliv- 
 er to them what remained. 
 
 u Not so fast, friends," said the monkey ; " we owe jus- 
 tice to the court as well as to vou : what remains is due 
 
118 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 to me in right of my office :" upon which he crammed the 
 whole into his mouth, and gravely dismissed the court. 
 
 MORAL." 
 The scales of the law are seldom poised, till little or 
 nothing remains in either. 
 
 FABLE IV. 
 
 The Farmer and the Snake. 
 
 An honest farmer observing a snake lying under a 
 hedge, almost frozen to death, was moved with compas- 
 sion ; and bringing it home, he laid it upon the hearth, 
 near the fire. 
 
 Thus warmed and cherished, the snake shortly began 
 to revive : but no sooner had he recovered strength enough 
 to do mischief, than he sprang upon the farmer's wife, bit 
 one of his children, and in short, threw the whole family 
 into confusion and terror. 
 
 " Ungrateful wretch !" said the man ; " thou hast suffi- 
 ciently taught me how ill-judged it is to confer benefits 
 on the worthless and undeserving/' So saying, he im- 
 mediately snatched up a hatchet, and cut the snake in 
 pieces. 
 
 MORAL. 
 
 To confer power upon the mischievous, or favours on 
 the undeserving, is a misapplication of our benevolence. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 119 
 
 FABLE V. 
 
 The Wolf and the Crane. 
 
 A wolf with too much greediness, swallowed a bone ; 
 which unfortunately stuck in his throat. In the violence 
 of his pain, he applied to several animals,earnestly entrea- 
 ting them to extract it. 
 
 None of them dared hazard the dangerous experiment, 
 except the crane ; who, persuaded by his solemn pro- 
 mises of a compensation, ventured to thrust her enormous 
 length of neck down his throat ; and having succesfully 
 performed the operation, claimed the recompense. 
 
 " See how unreasonable some creatures are," said the 
 wolf ; " have I not suffered thee safely to draw thy neck 
 out of my jaws, and hast thou the conscience to demand 
 a further reward ?" 
 
 MORAL. 
 
 The utmost extent of some men's gratitude, is barely 
 to refrain from oppressing and injuring their benefactors. 
 
 FABLE VI. 
 The Eagle and the Crow. 
 An eagle, from the top of a high mountain, pounced 
 upon a lamb, and bore it away to her young. A crow 
 
120 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 observing what passed, was ambitious of performing the 
 same exploit ; and darting from her nest, fixed her talons 
 in the fleece of another lamb. 
 
 But neither able to move her prey, nor to disentangle 
 her feet, she was taken up by the shepherd, and carried 
 home to his children for a plaything, who eagerly inquir- 
 ed what bird it was ? 
 
 An hour ago, said the father, she fancied herself an 
 eagle : however, by this time, 1 suppose she is convin- 
 ced of being only a crow. 
 
 MORAL. 
 
 A false estimate of our abilities, exposes us to ridicule, 
 and sometimes to danger. 
 
 FABLE VII. 
 
 The Farmer and his three Enemies. 
 
 A wolf, a fox, and a rabbit, happened one evening to be fora- 
 ging in different parts of a farmer's yard. Their first at- 
 tempt was very successful, and they returned to their several 
 quarters in safety. 
 
 However, they were perceived by. the farmer's watchful 
 eye; who immediately placed several kinds of snares, air I 
 made each his prisoner in the next attempt. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 121 
 
 He first took the rabbit to task ; who confessed she had 
 eaten a few turnip-tops, merely to satisfy her hunger ; and be- 
 sought him piteously to spare her life, promising never to en- 
 ter his grounds again. 
 
 He next examined the fox ; who in a fawning obsequious 
 tone, protested that he came into his premises through no other 
 motive than pure good will, to restrain the rabbits and other 
 vermin from the plunder of his corn. 
 
 And he further added, that whatever evil tongues might say, 
 he had too much regard both for him and for justice, to be in 
 the least guilty of any dishonest action. 
 
 He then, lastly, examined the wolf; asking what business 
 brought him within the purlieus of a farmer's yard? The wolf 
 very impudently declared, it was with the view of destroying 
 his lambs, to which he had an undoubted right. 
 
 The farmer, he said, was the only felon, who robbed the 
 community of wolves of what was meant to be their proper 
 food : that this, at least, was his opinion ; and whatever fate 
 attended him, he should not scruple to risk his life in the pur- 
 suit of his lawful prey. 
 
 The farmer having heard their pleas, determined the cause 
 in the following manner : the rabbit, said he, deserves compas- 
 sion for the penitence she shows, and the humble confession 
 she has made. 
 
 As for the fox and wolf, let them be hanged together : cri- 
 minals alike with respect to their crimes, they have alike 
 heightened their equal guilt, by the aggravations of hypocri- 
 sy and impudence. 
 
 MORAL. 
 
 Humility extenuates a crime, of which hypocrisy and im- 
 pudence are equal aggravations. 
 
 FABLE VIII. 
 The Wolf and the Shepherds. 
 A wolf, peeping into a hut, where a company of shep- 
 herds were regaling themselves with a joint of mutton, 
 — "bless me," said he, " what a clamour these men would 
 have raised if they had catched me at such a banquet." 
 
 MORAL. 
 We often censure that conduct in others, which we 
 practice ourselves without scruple. 
 

 
 122 THE PICTORIAL SPSLLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LXX1IL 
 
 The following section is composed of words, in which two or more 
 
 words have the same sound, but 
 
 are different in spelling and signifi- 
 
 cation. 
 
 I 
 
 Azl, a disease. 
 
 Break, to part by force. 
 
 Ale, a kind of beer, 
 
 Bread, food. 
 
 Air, an element. 
 
 Bred, brought up. 
 
 Heir, to an estate. 
 
 Buy, to purchase. 
 
 All, every one. 
 
 By, a particle. 
 
 Awl, an instrument. 
 
 But, except. 
 
 Al' tar, for sacrifice. 
 
 Butt, a vessel. 
 
 Al' ter, to change. 
 
 Call, to cry out. 
 
 As cent', steepness, [ing. 
 
 Caul, of the bowels. 
 
 As sent', the act of agree- 
 
 Ceil' ing, the inner roof. 
 
 Bazl, a surety. 
 
 Seal' ing, setting of a seal. 
 
 Bale, a pack of goods. 
 
 Cell, a hut. 
 
 Ball, a round substance. 
 
 Sell, to dispose of. 
 
 Bawl, to cry aloud. 
 
 Cel' lar, the lowest room. 
 
 Bare, naked. 
 
 SeP ler, one who sells. 
 
 Bear, a beast ; to suffer 
 
 Cere, to wax over. 
 
 Base, mean, vile. 
 
 Sear, to burn. 
 
 Bass, a part in music. 
 
 Seer, a prophet. 
 
 Be, to exist. 
 
 Cent, a copper coin. 
 
 Bee, an insect* 
 
 Scent, smell. 
 
 Beach, the shore. 
 
 Sent, did send. 
 
 Beech, a kind of tree. 
 
 Col lar, for the neck. 
 
 Beat, to strike. 
 
 Choi er, anger, rage. 
 
 Beet, a root. 
 
 Cite, to summon. 
 
 Beer, a liquor, [dead. 
 
 Site, situation. 
 
 Bier, a carriage for the 
 
 Sight, the sense of seeing. 
 
 Bell, a sounding vessel. 
 
 Clause, a sentence. 
 
 Belle, a gay young lady 
 
 Claws, the feet of birds. 
 
 Ber ry, a small fruit. 
 
 Clim£, to ascend. 
 
 Bur y, to inter the dead. 
 
 Clime, climate, region. 
 
 Blew, did blow. 
 
 Close, to shut up. 
 
 Blue, a kind of colour, 
 
 Clones, garments. 
 
 Bow, to shoot with. 
 
 Coarse, not fine. 
 
 Beau, a gay fellow. 
 
 Cowrse, direction. 
 
 Though, a branch. 
 
 Cof fer, a chest for money. 
 
 Bow, an act of civility. 
 
 Cottgh' er, one who coughs. 
 
 Brake, a kind of plant. 
 
 Core, the inner part. 
 
 
 

 
 THE PICTORIAI 
 
 . ....... , 
 
 , SPELLING-BOOK. 123 
 
 Corps, a body of soldiers. 
 1 Cous' in, relation. 
 
 Glare, to dazzle* 
 Grate, for coals. 
 
 | Coz' en, a cheat. 
 
 Great, large. 
 
 Cyg' net, a young swan. 
 Sig' net, a seal. 
 
 Groan, to sigh. 
 Grown, increased. 
 
 Dam, to stop water. 
 
 Hail, to salute. 
 
 Damn, to condemn. 
 
 Hale, sound, healthy. 
 
 Dear, costly. 
 
 Hair, of the head. 
 
 Deer, a wild animal. 
 
 Hare, an animal. 
 
 Dew, moisture. 
 
 Hall, a court of justice. 
 
 Due, owed. 
 
 Haul, to pull, to draw. 
 
 Die, to expire. 
 
 Hart, an animal. 
 
 Dye, to colour. 
 
 Heart, the seat of life. 
 
 Doe a female deer. 
 
 Heal, to cure. 
 
 Dough, unbaked paste. 
 Dun, brown colour. 
 
 Heel, part of the foot. 
 Hear, to perceive by the ear. 
 
 Done, performed. 
 
 Here, in this place. 
 
 Fain, gladly. 
 
 Herd, a number of beasts. 
 
 Fane, a temple. 
 
 Heard did hear. 
 
 Feign, to dissemble. 
 
 Hew, to cut. 
 
 Faint, languid. [ance. 
 
 Hue, a colour, 
 
 Feint, a false appear- 
 Fair, beautiful. 
 
 Hugh, a man's name. 
 Hie, to hasten. 
 
 Fare, food. 
 
 Feet, plural of foot. 
 
 High, elevated, lofty. 
 Him, that man. 
 
 Feat, action, exploit. 
 Fel loe, rim of a wheel. 
 
 Hymn, a song of adoration. 
 Hole, a hollow place. 
 
 Fel low, an associate. 
 
 Whole, total. 
 
 Flea, an insect. . 
 
 Hay, dried grass. 
 
 Flee, to run away. 
 Flew, did fly. 
 
 Hey, an expression of joy. 
 Ho, a sudden exclamation. 
 
 Flue, soft down. 
 
 Hoe, a garden tool. 
 
 Fore, before. 
 
 In, within. 
 
 Four, twice two. 
 
 Inn, a tavern. 
 
 Foul, filthy, unclean. 
 Fowl, a bird. 
 
 Kill, to slay. 
 Kilw, of brick. 
 
 Freeze, to congeal. 
 
 Lacks, doth lack. 
 
 Frieze, a coarse cloth. 
 
 Lax, looseness. 
 
 Gate, a kind of door. 
 
 Lade, to dip water. 
 
 Gait, manner of walking. 
 
 Laid, placed. 
 
 Gilt, adorned with gold. 
 
 Lane, a narrow street. 
 
 Gwilt, crime, an offence. 
 
 Lain, did lie. 
 
 1 Glaire, the white of an egg. 
 
 Leaf, of a tree. 
 

 
 124 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Lief, willingly. 
 
 Mown, cut down. 
 
 Led, did lead. 
 
 Moat, a ditch. 
 
 Lead, heavy metal. 
 
 Mote, a small particle. 
 
 Leek, a root. 
 
 Nap, a short sleep. 
 
 Leak, to run out. 
 
 i£nap, to bite. 
 
 Les' sen, to make less. 
 
 Nay, no. 
 
 Les' son, a task. 
 
 Neigh, the voice of a horse. 
 
 Links, part of a chain. 
 
 Nave, of a wheel. 
 
 Lynx, a beast. 
 
 ifnave, a rascal. 
 
 Li' ar, a teller of lies. 
 
 Neal, to temper by heat. 
 
 Lyre, a harp. 
 
 iTneel, to bend the knee. 
 
 Lim&, a member. 
 
 New, not old. 
 
 Limn, to paint. 
 
 .Knew, did know. 
 
 Lo, behold. 
 
 Night, the time of darkness. 
 
 Low, humble. 
 
 Knight, a title of honour. 
 
 Lock, to close fast. 
 
 No, not so. 
 
 Lough, a lake. 
 
 Know, to understand. 
 
 Lone, single. 
 
 Nose, of the face. 
 
 Loan, any thing lent. 
 
 Knows, doth know. 
 
 Made, did make. [man. 
 
 Nun, a female recluse. 
 
 Maid, an unmarried wo. 
 
 None, not any. 
 
 Mail, a packet. 
 
 Oar, to row with. 
 
 Male, the he kind. 
 
 Ore, metal unrefined. 
 
 Mam, chief. 
 
 Our, belonging to us. 
 
 Mane, of a horse. 
 
 Hour, sixty minutes. 
 
 Mar' shal, an officer. 
 
 Pail, a vessel, 
 
 Mar' tial, warlike. 
 
 Pale, faint of lustre. 
 
 Meed, a reward. 
 
 Pain, torment. 
 
 Mead, a kind of drink 
 
 Pane, a square of glass. 
 
 Mean, of low rank. 
 
 Pair, two of a sort. 
 
 Mien, air, aspect. 
 
 Pare, to cut off. 
 
 Meat, flesh, food. 
 
 Pear, a kind of fruit. 
 
 Meet, to come together. 
 
 Pause, a stop. 
 
 Mete, to measure. 
 
 Paws, feet of a beast. 
 
 Me' ter, a measurer. 
 
 Peace, quietness. 
 
 Me' tre, poetical measure. 
 
 Piece, a part. 
 
 Mewl, to cry as a child. 
 
 Peal, sound of bells. 
 
 Mule, an animal. 
 
 Peel, the skin or rind. 
 
 Might, power. 
 
 Plum, a kind of fruit. 
 
 Mite, a small insect. 
 
 Plum&, a weight on a line. 
 
 Mi' ner, a worker in mines. Pole, a long stick. 
 
 Mi' nor, one under age. 
 
 Poll, the head. 
 
 Moan, to lament. 
 
 Prac' tice use, custom. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 125 
 
 Prac' tise, to do habitual 
 Pray, to supplicate. 
 Prey, a booty. 
 
 Prof 7 it, gain. 
 
 Proph 7 ct, a foreteller. 
 Ram, falling water. 
 Re/n, part of a bridle. 
 Kcign, to rule. 
 
 Ra/se, to lift up. 
 
 Rays, beams of light. 
 
 Raze, to destroy. 
 Rap, to strike. 
 Wrap, to fold together. 
 
 Red, a colour. 
 
 Read, did read. 
 Reed, a plant. 
 Read, to peruse. 
 
 Rest, ease. 
 
 Wrest, to force. 
 Right, just, true. 
 Rite, ceremony. 
 Write, to form letters. 
 Wright, a workman. 
 
 Ring, to sound. 
 
 Wring, to twist. 
 Road, the highway. 
 Rode, did ride, 
 
 Ruff, a neckcloth. 
 
 Rough, not smooth. 
 Rung, sounded. 
 Wrung, twisted. 
 
 Rye, a sort of grain. 
 
 Wry, crooked. 
 Sa/1, of a ship. 
 Sale, the act of selling. 
 
 Scene, part of a play. 
 
 Seen, beheld. 
 
 Sc/ne, a fish net. 
 Sea, the ocean.- 
 See, to behold. 
 
 Scam, two edges joined. 
 
 Seem, to appear. 
 
 ly. Seas, great waters. 
 Sees, doth see. 
 Sezzc, to lay hold of. 
 
 Shear, to cut with shears. 
 
 Shire, a county. 
 Size, bulk. 
 Sighs, doth sigh. 
 
 Sign, a token. 
 
 Sine, a geometrical line. 
 Slay, to kill. 
 Sla?'e, a weaver's reed. 
 Sley, to part into threads. 
 
 Slight, neglect. 
 
 Sleight, dexterity. 
 So, thus. 
 
 Sew, to join by threads. 
 Sow, to scatter. 
 
 Soar, to fly upwards. 
 
 Sore, a tender place. 
 
 Sow 7 er, one who sows. 
 Sole, bottom of the foot. 
 Sowl, the spirit. 
 
 Sum, the whole. 
 
 Some, a part. 
 Sun, the fountain of light. 
 Son, a male child. 
 
 Sord, turf 
 
 Sword, a weapon. 
 Stare, to look earnestly. 
 Stair, a step. 
 
 Stake, a piece of wood. 
 
 Steak, a slice of meat. 
 Steal, to take by theft. 
 Steel, hard metal. 
 
 Stile, a set of steps. 
 
 Style, manner of writing. 
 Straight, not crooked. 
 Strait, a narrow pass. 
 
 Tacks, small nails. 
 
 Tax, a rate. 
 Tare, weight allowed. 
 Tear, to rend. 
 
 11* 
 
126 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Vale, a valley. 
 
 Veil, a covering. 
 Vain, useless. 
 Vein, a blood vessel. 
 
 Ware, merchandise. 
 
 Wear, to consume. 
 Weak, feeble. 
 Week seven days. 
 
 Wood, timber. 
 
 Would, was willing. 
 
 SECTION LXXIV. 
 
 Description of the Four Seasons. 
 SPRING. 
 
 The spring months are March, April, and May. Now 
 the gentle gales begin to blow, and soft descending 
 showers moisten the earth. 
 
 The ground is covered with young verdant flowers : 
 the trees put forth green buds, and deck themselves 
 with blossoms. All nature is beautified with bloom, 
 and perfumed with fragrant odours. 
 
 The birds fill every grove with the sweet melody of 
 their notes : they join in pairs to build their little nests, 
 which naughty boys often destroy. 
 
 The careful farmer now ploughs his fields, casts his 
 grain into the earth, and waits for harvest. 
 
 The tender lambs are playing about on the green 
 grass, among the sweet flowers : the cuckoo sings, and 
 universal nature seems to rejoice. 
 
 L 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 127 
 
 SUMMER. 
 
 ilBS 
 
 Iff^P^Ssj 
 
 lii.^Er 
 
 ^^^^^^^Ss^ 
 
 
 
 iisPsf^lt^ 
 
 -j^fci 
 
 
 
 Sg^^^: 
 
 ^^^^^S^gjto^p^r^^R^BH 
 
 ^5§Bs? ^E*c'*i? b 
 
 
 vspi^^^S 
 
 ^^PU^H 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 SifPlNM3 
 
 f§|fj| 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The summer months are June, July and August ; 
 when the sun darts his heating rays with greater force 
 on the earth, and lengthens out the day. 
 
 The flocks and herds unable to endure the scorching 
 heat, retire beneath the shade of some large spreading 
 tree. 
 
 Early in the morning, the industrious farmer walking 
 forth with his scythe in his hand, goes into the mead- 
 ow, and with a sweeping stroke cuts down the grass. 
 
 The cheerful hay-makers with fork and rake soon 
 follow. They toss, and turn, and spread the new-mown 
 hay, and raise it into stacks. 
 
 But behold ! the face of heaven is overcast ! black 
 clouds arise, hoarse thunder at a distance first is heard, 
 and soon the glaring flash, and loud amazing claps burst 
 over their heads ; while from the teeming clouds the 
 sudden shower with violence descends. 
 
 But soon the shower is passed, and it is very pleas- 
 ant again. How sweet the flowers smell ! the trees, 
 the hedges, and the grass, look fresh and green. 
 
 How beautiful are the fields of wheat ! The yellow 
 harvest tempts the reaper's sickle, and the careful far- 
 mer fills his spacious barn with various sorts of grain. 
 
128 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 AUTUMN OR FALL. 
 
 
 K9 
 
 " - 
 
 
 fellllill 
 
 ./._-■:, 
 
 pp^ 
 
 && _ 
 
 
 ;"* H-s* -„:"' - 
 
 iBB 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 Wjj^~W *•* ^ ^_ ?gw 
 
 i&fii 
 
 
 
 
 . - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Hg 
 
 Is 
 
 
 
 
 ^^^4« 
 
 
 
 iPlfe^Gi 
 
 s 
 
 
 mill 
 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^^B 
 
 Nfi2 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 splIliH 
 
 5 
 
 afeB^^in,- ' g ^^ : "iw^^j 
 
 Nf" *>sBS 
 
 The Autumnal months are September, October, and 
 November. The mellow orchards now afford their va- 
 rious fruits, such as apple, peach, pear, quince, and fig. 
 
 Now the grape vines are loaded with delicious fruit, 
 and the juicy grapes hang in clusters upon the branches. 
 
 Now the verdure of the plants decay ; the leaves of 
 the forest are nipped with frost ; they turn red and yel- 
 low, and present a beautiful variety of shades to charm 
 the eye. 
 
 The sanguine sportsmen now traverse the fields and 
 groves, with various instruments of death. The wide 
 spreading net entangles the fluttering covey, while the fa- 
 tal gun brings down the frighted partridge, plover, or fine 
 plumed pheasant. 
 
 But hark ! the cry of hounds, and the voice of hunts- 
 men strike the ear ; and see ! the bounding deer flies over 
 the forest. 
 
 Now in the tangling woods, the boys with eagerness 
 pull down the clustering nuts. 
 
 Nowthe laborious bees are robbed of their winter stock 
 of honey, and cruelly murdered. 
 
 But lo ! the rising mists at morn and evening, the chil- 
 ling breeze, the falling leaves, and the decayed herbage, 
 declare the approach of a more dreary season. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 129 
 
 
 WINTER. 
 
 
 ^^^»^^^^^B 
 
 JP^ ^^^^^K^^^^-^^S'^^P^^^^^^^^S^'^' 7 '^* 
 
 
 
 gill 
 
 The winter months are December, January and Feb- 
 ruary. Now the trees are all divested of their leaves. 
 
 No birds fill the air with their sweet music ; no ver- 
 dure clothes the plain, for the earth is covered with snow. 
 
 The winds blow cold, storms arise, and the faint dim 
 sun is scarcely seen or felt. 
 
 The fur and wool supply warmth to the human race ; 
 or round the cheerful fire they sit, and talk, and laugh, 
 and sing, while through the long dark night the north 
 wind blows, and the tempest roars. 
 
 The powers of nature seem bound up or dead. The 
 waters all congealed to ice, admit the crowds of sliding 
 boys, or bolder youth with skates beneath their feet, who 
 swiftly skim around the level surface. 
 
 The careful farmer feeds his flocks and herds with 
 hay ; and the thrasher in his barn, from morn to night, 
 pursues the flail's laborious task. 
 
 In Winter how white is the snow ! 
 
 While boys on the ice are at play : 
 In Spring" the green herbage will grow, 
 
 With all the sweet flowers of May. 
 
 What charms does the Summer unfold ! 
 
 While hay-makers breathe the sweet air: 
 And Autumn brings treasures of gold, 
 
 The apple, the peach, and the pear. 
 
I 
 
 130 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LXXV. 
 
 The following words are somewhat similar in sound, and are often improperly 
 pronounced alike. 
 
 A' bel, a man's name* 
 A' ble, having power. 
 
 Ac cept/, to receive* 
 
 Ex cept/, to leave out* 
 Ac cess', an approach. 
 Ex cess 7 , superfluity. 
 
 Acts, deeds. 
 
 Axe, to cut with. 
 
 Ask, to request. 
 Affect', to move. 
 Ef feet', to bring to pass. 
 
 Ar' rant, bad. 
 
 Er' rand, a message. 
 
 Er' rant, wandering. 
 Ba' con, smoked pork. 
 Bea' con, a light-house. 
 
 Bal' lad, a song. 
 
 Bal' lot, a vote. 
 Bar' on, a title of honour. 
 Bar' ren, unfruitful. 
 
 Bri' dal, nuptial. 
 
 Bri r die, for a horse. 
 Bust, an image. 
 Burst, to break suddenly. 
 
 Cents plural of cent. 
 
 Sense, sensation. 
 
 Since, after, [time. 
 CTiron' i cal, relating to 
 Chron' i cle, a history. 
 
 Coat, a garment. 
 
 Quote, to cite. 
 Con' cert, of music. 
 Con' sort, a companion. 
 
 Cork, to cork bottles. 
 
 CaZk, to calk vessels. 
 Coun' oil, an assembly. 
 Coun' sel, advice. 
 
 De scent', a going down. 
 
 Dis sent', disagreement. 
 
 Due, owed. 
 
 Do, to act. 
 De cease', to die. 
 Dis ease', sickness. 
 
 Dome, a building. 
 
 Doom, to sentence. 
 Does, doth. 
 Doze, to slumber. 
 
 Dust, fine dry dirt. 
 
 Durst, dared. 
 E merge', to rise. 
 Im merge' to put under water. 
 
 Em' i nent, exalted. 
 
 Im' mi nent, threatening. 
 Ex' tant, now in being. 
 Ex tent', utmost limits. 
 
 File, an instrument. 
 
 Foil, to overcome. 
 Harsh, rough, severe. 
 Hash, to mince. 
 
 Ha' ven, a harbour. 
 
 Heav' en, the region above. 
 I die, lazy. 
 I dol, an image. 
 
 Isle, [ile] an island. 
 
 Oil, grease, fat. 
 Jest, a joke. 
 Just, right, honest. 
 
 Lick' er ish, nice, delicate. 
 
 Lie' or ice, a sweet root. 
 Loam, a kind of earth. 
 Loom, a weaver's machine. 
 
 Line, a string. 
 
 Loin, the reins. 
 Marsh, wet ground. 
 Mash, to bruise. 
 Mesh, of a net. 
 
 Mild, kind, tender. 
 
 Mile, eight furlongs. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 131 
 
 Mind, intelligent power. 
 Mine, belonging to me. 
 
 Mole, a small animal. 
 
 Mowld, to shape. 
 News, tidings. 
 Noose, a running knot. 
 
 Of, [ov] concerning. 
 
 Off, at a distance. 
 Or 7 der, method. 
 Or 7 dure, filth. 
 
 Pal' ate, of the mouth 
 
 Pal' let, a small bed. 
 Pa' tron, a benefactor. 
 Pat' tern, a specimen. 
 
 Pies, a kind of food. 
 
 Poise, to ba]ance. 
 Pint, half a quart. 
 Point, a stop. 
 
 Pop' u lace, the people. 
 
 Pop' u lous, full of people. 
 Prin' ci pal, chief. 
 Prin' ci pie, first cause. 
 
 Rack, to torture. 
 
 TFreck, ruin, shipwreck. 
 Rad' ish, a garden root. 
 Red' dish, somewhat red. 
 
 Re' al, true, genuine. 
 
 Roy' al, kingly. 
 Sal' a ry, stated hire. 
 Cel' e ry, a species of parsley. 
 
 Sects, parties in religion. 
 
 Sex, male or female. 
 Star' ling, a bird. 
 Ster' ling, English money. 
 
 Tile, earthen shingles. 
 
 Toil, to labour. 
 Track, a mark left. 
 Tract, a country. 
 
 Un do', to take to pieces. 
 
 Un due', not due. 
 Which, this or that, [lawful arts 
 Witch, a woman given to un- 
 
 Wan' der, to ramble abroad. 
 
 Won' der, admiration. 
 Yarn, spun wool, [passion. 
 Yearn, to be moved with com. 
 
 ODE TO CHILDHOOD. 
 
 Childhood, happiest stage of life ! 
 Free from care and free from strife ; 
 Time, when all that meets the view, 
 All can charm, for all is new : . 
 How thy long lost hours I mourn, 
 Never, never to return. 
 
 Then to toss the circling ball, 
 Caught rebounding from the wall ; 
 Then the mimic ship to guide 
 Down the kennel's dirty tide ; 
 Then the hoop's revolving pace 
 Through the dusty street to chase — 
 O what joy ! — it once was mine, 
 Childhood, matchless boon of thine ; 
 How thy long-lost hours I mourn, 
 Never, never to return. 
 
132 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LXXVL 
 
 A Walk in the Fields. 
 
 Here is the picture of Henry, and Lucy, and William, 
 and little Mary, who, in company with their father, are ta- 
 king a walk in the fields among the beautiful wild flowers. 
 
 The father is talking to them about the trees, the grass, 
 the flowers, and many other things ; and telling them a 
 great deal which they did not know : hear what he is 
 saying to them, 
 
 The fir-tree grows on the high mountain, and the gray 
 willow bends itself over the stream. The thistle is arm- 
 ed with sharp prickles ; the mallows is soft and woolly. 
 
 The hop lays hold with her tendrils, and clasps the tall 
 pole ; the oak has a firm root in the ground, and resists 
 the winter storm. 
 
 The daisy enamels the meadows, and grows beneath 
 the foot of the passenger ; the tulip requires a rich soil, 
 and the careful hand of the gardener. 
 
 The iris and the reed spring up in the marsh ; the 
 rich grass covers the meadows ; and the purple heath- 
 flower enlivens the waste ground. 
 
 The w T ater-!il!ies grow beneath the stream, and their 
 broad leaves float on the water : the wall flower takes] 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 133 
 
 root among the hard stones, and spreads its fragrance 
 among broken ruins. 
 
 Every leaf is of a different form ; every plant is a sep- 
 arate inhabitant. 
 
 Look at the thorns that are white with blossoms, and 
 the flowers that cover the fields, and the plants that are 
 trodden in the green path. 
 
 The hand of man hath not planted them ; the sower 
 hath not scattered the seeds from his hands, nor the gar- 
 dener digged a place for them with his spade. 
 
 Some grow on steep rocks where no man can climb ; 
 some grow in bogs, and deep mires ; and others on de- 
 sert islands ; they spring up every where, and cover the 
 bosom of the whole earth. 
 
 Who causes them to grow every where, and blows the 
 seeds about in the wind, and mixes them with the earth, 
 and waters them with soft rains, and cherishes them with 
 dews? 
 
 Who fans them with the pure breath of heaven, and 
 gives them colours and smells, and spreads out their thin 
 transparent leaves ? 
 
 How does the rose draw its crimson from the dark 
 brown earth ; or the lily its shining white ? How can a 
 small seed contain a plant? How does every plant know 
 its proper season to put forth ? 
 
 They are all marshalled in order; each one knows his 
 place, and stands up in his own rank. 
 
 When the spring comes, the snowdrop and primrose 
 shoot forth ; the carnation waits for the full strength of 
 the year ; and the hardy evergreen cheers the winter 
 months. 
 
 Every plant produces its like. An ear of corn will not 
 grow from an acorn, nor will a grape-stone produce 
 cherries ; but every one springs from its proper seed. 
 
 Who preserves them alive through the cold winter, 
 when the snow is on the ground, and the sharp white 
 frost bites on the plain ? 
 
 Who saves a small seed, and a little warmth in the bo- 
 som of the earth, and causes it to spring up afresh, and 
 sap to ris e through the hard fibres ? 
 
134 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 It is God the Creator of the world that does all these things. 
 These are but a small part of his works, and a little portion of 
 his wonders. 
 
 SECTION LXXVIL 
 
 The Blind Soldier. 
 
 Charles, do you see that poor blind man at the door? Yes. 
 mother, who is it? It is poor old Simon : he is an old soldier : 
 he became lame and blind in the service of his country. The 
 little boy you see with him, leads him from door to door. 
 
 How sorry I am ! said Emma. — You once said, mother, 
 we ought to be kind to old soldiers and sailors, because they 
 fight to protect us. So I did, my dear Emma ; and poor old 
 Simon, I am sure, deserves our kindness. 
 
 Mother, said Charles, shall I give him my pennies ? and 
 shall I give him my cake ? said Emma ; and I will give him 
 mine too, said little Samuel. 
 
 Well, my dear children, I will not restrain your gifts ; but 
 Simon will like something more : we will give him some 
 bread, and meat, and cheese, to carry home for his poor wife. 
 
 Mother, Simon is now going — See ! he goes off so pleased ! 
 and yet I saw the tears run down his cheeks when we gave 
 him the provision ; and he said, " May Heaven reward you 
 for your kindness." 
 
 Very likely, my dear, they were tears of thanks and grati- 
 tude. 
 

 
 
 : . 
 
 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 135 
 
 
 SECTION LXXVIII. 
 
 
 A Catalogue of all the Proper Names contained in the New 
 
 Testament ; pronounced according to Walker's Rules for 
 
 the pronunciation of 
 
 Scripture Pi 
 
 *oper Names 
 
 . 
 
 The same rule 
 
 3S to be observe 
 
 d in the pronunciation of the following words, as 
 
 in those taken from the Dictionary. 
 
 
 
 In the following words, th has its sharp sounc 
 
 , and c before h has the sound of 
 
 k, unless otherwise denned. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Caen 
 
 Ca naan 
 
 Jo nan 
 
 see 
 
 Si na* 
 
 Christ 
 
 Ce dron 
 
 Jo nas 
 
 Pa phos 
 
 Si na 
 
 Crete 
 
 Ce phas 
 
 Jo ram 
 
 Pe ter 
 
 Si on 
 
 Eve 
 
 Ce sar 
 
 Jo rim 
 
 Pha lee 
 
 Sta c/iys |j 
 
 Greece 
 
 C/ii os 
 
 Jo se 
 
 Pha raoh 
 
 Ste phen 
 
 Greek 
 
 Ohio e 
 
 Jo seph 
 
 Pha res 
 
 Sy c/iar 
 
 James 
 
 Chu. za 
 
 Jo ses 
 
 Phe be 
 
 Sy c/tem 
 
 Jew 
 
 Cni dus 
 
 Ju da 
 
 Phle gon 
 
 Tha mar 
 
 Job 
 
 Co os 
 
 Ju da/i 
 
 Pi late 
 
 Tha ra 
 
 Jude 
 
 Co re 
 
 Ju das 
 
 Pu dens 
 
 Then das 
 
 Luke 
 
 Co sam 
 
 La mec/i 
 
 Ra ca 
 
 Ti mon 
 
 Medes 
 
 Cy prus 
 
 Le vi 
 
 Ra c/iab 
 
 Ti tus 
 
 R/todes 
 
 Da vid 
 
 Le vites 
 
 Ra chelj 
 
 Tro as 
 
 Spain 
 
 De mas 
 
 Li nus 
 
 Ra gan 
 
 Za ra 
 
 Tyre 
 
 E gypt 
 
 Lo is 
 
 Ra hab 
 
 Ze nas 
 
 A a ron 
 
 E noc/i 
 
 Lu cas 
 
 Ra ma 
 
 A bra ham 
 
 A bel 
 
 E non 
 
 Ma ath 
 
 Khe sa 
 
 A dri a 
 
 A c/iaz 
 
 E nos 
 
 Ma gog 
 
 R/io da 
 
 A si a § 
 
 A c/iim 
 
 E sau 
 
 Ma ry 
 
 Ro mans 
 
 Ec li al 
 
 A gar 
 
 Fe lix 
 
 Me nan 
 
 Ru fus 
 
 Caf a phas 
 
 A mon 
 
 Fo rum 
 
 Mo loc/i 
 
 Sa doc 
 
 Cie o phas 
 
 A mos 
 
 Ga ius* 
 
 Mo SCS 
 
 Sa la 
 
 Cre ti a ns % 
 
 A ram 
 
 Ga za 
 
 Ny ra 
 
 Sa lem 
 
 E lam ites 
 
 A sa 
 
 He ber 
 
 Na c/ior 
 
 Sa lim 
 
 E phra im 
 
 A ser 
 
 He brews 
 
 Na in 
 
 Sa mos 
 
 jEu ty c/ms 
 
 A zor 
 
 He 11 
 
 Na than 
 
 Sa ra or 
 
 Ga bri el 
 
 Baal 
 
 I saac 
 
 Na um 
 
 Sa ra/e 
 
 Ja i rus 
 
 Ba iaam 
 
 Ja cob 
 
 Ne ri 
 
 Sa ron 
 
 Jo a tham 
 
 Ba lak 
 
 Ja red 
 
 Ne ro 
 
 Sa ruch 
 
 Ju li a 
 
 Ba rak 
 
 Ja son 
 
 Ni gerf 
 
 See va 
 
 Ju li us 
 
 Bo oz 
 
 Je sus 
 
 No a/i 
 
 Si don 
 
 Ju ni a 
 
 Bo sor 
 
 Jo el 
 
 Noe 
 
 Si las 
 
 Ju pi ter 
 
 Ca na 
 
 Jo na 
 
 bed 
 
 Si mon 
 
 Lu ci us ** 
 
 I 
 
 * i like y. fg-hard. % chlike tsh. || Sta'kees. §si 
 
 ike zhe.^ti like 
 
 she. ** alike she. i, 
 
136 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 Ma di an 
 
 Lys tra 
 
 Ep a phras 
 
 Scyth i ans 
 
 
 Mi cha. el 
 
 Mai c/ms 
 
 Eph e sus 
 
 Sem e i 
 
 
 Na a man 
 
 Mat than 
 
 Eph pha tha 
 
 Ser gi us 
 
 
 Ne ri us 
 
 Mat that 
 
 Gab ba tha 
 
 Sil o am 
 
 
 R/ie gi urn 
 
 Mat thew 
 
 Gal i lee 
 
 Sim e on 
 
 
 2 
 
 Mel c/ii 
 
 Gal li o 
 
 Steph a nas 
 
 
 Cis 
 
 Nag ge* 
 
 Gid e on* 
 
 Syn ty che 
 
 
 Er 
 
 Nym phas 
 
 Is ra el 
 
 Syr a cuse 
 
 
 Gad 
 
 Pat mos 
 
 Is sa e/iar 
 
 Syr i a 
 
 
 Sem 
 
 Per ga 
 
 It a ly 
 
 Svr i an? 
 
 
 Seth 
 
 Per sis 
 
 Jeph tha e 
 
 fab i tha 
 
 
 Abba 
 
 Phil ip 
 
 Jer e my 
 
 Ter ti us** 
 
 
 Ad am 
 
 Pris ca 
 
 Jer i c/io 
 
 Tim o thy 
 
 
 Ad di 
 
 Rem phan 
 
 Jez a bel 
 
 Tych i cus 
 
 
 An drew 
 
 Sal mon 
 
 Laz a rus 
 
 Ur ba ne 
 
 
 An na 
 
 Sam son 
 
 Lyb i a 
 
 Zabu Ion 
 
 
 An nas 
 
 Smyr na j 
 
 Ly ci a || 
 
 Zeb e dee 
 
 
 As sos 
 
 Ag a bus 
 
 Lyd i a 
 
 Is ra el ites 
 
 
 Ath ens 
 
 Am pli as 
 
 Lys i as 
 
 3 
 
 
 Bias tus 
 
 An ti oc/i 
 
 Mag da la 
 
 Paul 
 
 
 Cas tor 
 
 An ti pas 
 
 Man a en 
 
 Saul 
 
 
 C7iar ran 
 
 Ap phi a^ 
 
 Mat ta tha 
 
 Clau da 
 
 
 Clem ent 
 
 Ap pi i 
 
 Mel i ta 
 
 Cor ban 
 
 
 Cres cens 
 
 Aq ui la 
 
 Mid i an 
 
 Dor cas 
 
 
 Cris pus 
 
 Bab y Ion 
 
 Mys i a 
 
 Jor dan 
 
 
 Der be 
 
 Ben ja min 
 
 Naz a reth 
 
 Pau lus 
 
 
 Em mor 
 
 Beth a ny 
 
 Neph tha lim 
 
 Quar tus 
 
 
 Es li 
 
 Beth le hem 
 
 Nic o las 
 
 Clau di a 
 
 
 Es rom 
 
 Beth pha ge 
 
 Nin e veh 
 
 Clau di us 
 
 
 Fes tus 
 
 Cal va ry 
 
 Nin e vites 
 
 4 
 
 
 Her mas 
 
 Can aan ites 
 
 Pat a ra 
 
 Mark 
 
 
 Her mes 
 
 Can da ce 
 
 Pat ro bas 
 
 Car pus 
 
 
 Her od 
 
 Cen c/ire a 
 
 Per ga mos 
 
 Mar cus 
 
 
 Jam bres 
 
 Dam a ris 
 
 Phar i sees 
 
 Mar tha 
 
 
 Jan na 
 
 Dan i el 
 
 Phryg i a 
 
 Sar dis 
 
 
 Jan nes 
 
 Did y mus 
 
 Pub li us 
 
 Tar sus 
 
 
 Jes se 
 
 Em ma us 
 
 Sad du cee* 
 
 Ar te mas 
 
 
 Jus tus 
 
 El mo dam 
 
 Sal a mis 
 
 Bar na bas 
 
 
 Lyd da 
 
 El y mas 
 
 Sam u el 
 
 Bar sa bas 
 
 
 * g hard. 
 
 i Smer' na. J A.f* 
 
 e a. J! Lis!/ e a. 
 
 ** ft like she. 
 
 

 THE PICTORIAL 
 
 SPELLING-BOOK 
 
 137 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 Par me nas 
 
 Di a na 
 
 Cor ne li us 
 
 Dru sil la 
 
 Par thi ans 
 
 E li as 
 
 Cy re ni ans 
 
 E ras tus 
 
 5 
 
 Eliud 
 
 Cy re ni us 
 
 Jo an na 
 
 Gog 
 
 E ne as 
 
 Dal ma ti a* 
 
 Ma nas ses 
 
 John 
 
 Eu bu lus 
 
 De me tri us 
 
 Na as son 
 
 Lot 
 
 Eu ni ce 
 
 E li a kim 
 
 Nar cis sus 
 
 Cor inth 
 
 Eu phra tes 
 
 E phe si ansf 
 
 Phi lip pi 
 
 J op pa 
 
 Jo si as 
 
 E sa i as 
 
 Phy gel lus 
 
 01 Wes 
 
 Ju de a 
 
 Eu o di as 
 
 Pris cil la 
 
 Pol lux 
 
 La se a 
 
 Ga la ti a* 
 
 Re bee ca 
 
 Pon tus 
 
 Lcb be us 
 
 Ga la ti ans * 
 
 Sa rep ta 
 
 Sod urn 
 
 Mat thi as 
 
 Ga ma li el 
 
 Se cun dus 
 
 T/iom as 
 
 Me le a 
 
 He ro di ans 
 
 Su san na 
 
 Gol go tha 
 
 Mi le turn 
 
 He ro di as 
 
 Ter tul lus 
 
 Jos a phat 
 
 Mi le tus 
 
 I co ni um 
 
 Ty ran nus 
 
 01 i vet 
 
 Ni ca nor 
 
 Je ru sa lem 
 
 A eel da ma 
 
 Pon ti us 
 
 zi as 
 
 Ly sa ni as 
 
 A min a dab 
 
 Proc/i o rus 
 
 Pha nu el 
 
 Ma le le el 
 
 Am phip o lis 
 
 Sod o ma 
 
 Phe ni ce 
 
 Ma thu sa la 
 
 A syn cri tus 
 
 Sol o mon 
 
 Phi le mon 
 
 Mer cu ri us 
 
 Be el ze bub 
 
 Sop a ter 
 
 Phi le tus 
 
 Pi si di a 
 
 Beth ab a ra 
 
 Sos the nes 
 
 Rab bo ni 
 
 Pre to ri um 
 
 Bi thyn i a 
 
 Troph i mus 
 
 Ro bo am 
 
 Pu te o li 
 
 Ca per na um 
 
 6 1 
 
 Sal mo ne 
 
 Sa la thi el 
 
 Ci li ci a J 
 
 Rome or RomeSa lo me 
 
 Sa ma ri a 
 
 Co rin thi ans 
 
 Ruth or Ruth Sap phi ra 
 
 Sel eu ci a± 
 
 De cap o lis 
 
 1 
 
 Sil va nua 
 
 Ti be ri as 
 
 E lis a beth 
 
 A bi a 
 
 Thad de us 
 
 Ti be ri us 
 
 E man u el 
 
 A bi ud 
 
 Ti me us 
 
 Ti mo the us 
 
 E pen e tus 
 
 Al phe us 
 
 Try phe ne 
 
 2 
 
 Ge nes a reth 
 
 Are tas 
 
 Try pho sa 
 
 A bad don 
 
 Gen nes a ret 
 
 A zo tus 
 
 U ri as 
 
 A grip pa 
 
 Geth sem a ne§ 
 
 Bar je sus 
 
 Zac che us 
 
 A pel les 
 
 11 lyr i cum 
 
 Bar jo na 
 
 Ze lo tes 
 
 Ar chip pus 
 
 Is car i ot 
 
 Be re a 
 
 A bi a thar 
 
 Ar phax ad 
 
 Mel chis e dec 
 
 Ber ni ce 
 
 A cAa i cus 
 
 Au gus tus 
 
 Na than i el 
 
 Ca i nan 
 
 Ar a bi a 
 
 Ba rab bas 
 
 Ne ap o lis 
 
 C/ial do an 5 
 
 Ar a bi ans 
 
 Beth es da 
 
 nes i mus 
 
 C/io ra zin 
 
 A the ni ans 
 
 Co rin thus 
 
 Pam phyl i a 
 
 Cy re ne 
 
 Beth sa i da 
 
 Da mas cus 
 
 Phe ni ci a J 1 
 
 * ti like she. f si like z 
 
 he. | ci like she. ( 
 
 ) g hard. 
 
 
 12* 
 
 
 
138 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Phil lip pi ans 
 Sa mar i tans 
 So sip a ter 
 Tro gyl li urn 
 
 5 
 A pol los 
 A poll yon 
 Co los se 
 Go mor ra.h 
 Bar thol o mew 
 Co los si ans * 
 Di ot re phes 
 Her mog e nes 
 Ni cop o lis 
 Phi lol o gus 
 The oph i lus 
 Zo rob ab el 
 
 1 
 
 Dam a scenes 
 Gad a renes 
 Ger ge senes j - 
 Naz a renes 
 Ab i le ne 
 An a ni as 
 An dro ni cus 
 Ar che la us 
 At ta li a 
 Bar a cAa is 
 
 1 
 
 Bar ti me us 
 Ces a re a 
 Dal ma nu tha 
 E le a zar 
 E li e zer 
 El i se us 
 Ez e ki as 
 For tu na tus 
 Gal i le ans 
 Hy men e us 
 Id u me a 
 I; u re a 
 Jec o ni a/i 
 Jer e mi as 
 Mag da le ne 
 Mat ta thi as 
 Myt e le ne 
 Nic o de mus 
 Ptol e ma is 
 Thy a ti ra 
 Trac/i o ni tis 
 Zac/i a ri as 
 Ap ol lo ni a 
 Cap pa do ci a J 
 E thi o pi a 
 E thi o pi ans 
 Lye a o ni a 
 Mac e do ni a II 
 
 1 
 Mac e do ni ans || 
 Nic o la i tans 
 Sam o thra ci a J 
 Thes sa lo ni ans 
 
 2 
 Al ex an der 
 Ar ma ged don f 
 Bo a ner ges 
 Ad ra myt ti am 
 Al ex an dri a 
 Al ex an dri ans 
 Dy o nys i us § 
 On e siph o rus 
 Phil a del phi a 
 
 5 
 A re op a gite f 
 A re op a gus 
 
 1 
 Ar i ma the a 
 Ar is to bu lus 
 E paph ro di tus 
 La od i ce a 
 La od i ce ans 
 Pa ca ti a na 
 Tal i tha cu mi 
 Thes sa lo ni ca 
 Mes o po ta mi a 
 
 2 
 Sy ro phe ni ci ans J 
 
 Select Sentences. 
 
 When we are told of a fault, we should always try to avoid 
 it afterwards. 
 
 We should be kind to all persons, even to those who are un- 
 kind to us. 
 
 A kind action gives pleasure both to ourselves, and those to 
 whom we are kind. 
 
 Never insult the poor : poverty entitles a man to pity rather 
 than insult. 
 
 A man of virtue is an honour to his country, a glory to hu- 
 manity, a satisfaction to himself, and a benefactor to the world. 
 
 * Co losh' e anz. f g's hard. J ci like she. I| c like a. § Dio nish' e us. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 139 
 
 SECTION LXXIX. 
 
 The Ox, the Cow, and the Calf. 
 
 Here is the picture of an ox, a cow, and a calf. Oxen are 
 large, strong animals ; they submit to the yoke, plough the 
 fields, and draw the cart ; and are very useful to man. 
 
 But cows may be considered the most useful of all animals. 
 They give us milk, which is excellent food ; and of which we 
 make butter and cheese.* 
 
 The flesh of oxen and cows, is called beef. Their skins are 
 made into leather, of which boots and shoes are made. 
 Their tallow is made into candles. Their bones are used to 
 make handles for tooth-brushes, nail-brushes, and also for 
 making buttons. 
 
 Of their horns, combs, buttons, and many other things are 
 made. Their blood is sometimes used for purifying sugar ; 
 and their hair is mixed with lime and sand to make mortar 
 for plastering. 
 
 The young animal is called a calf: its flesh is called veal. 
 Leather is made of the skin, which is used for making shoes, 
 and covering books. 
 
140 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPSLLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LXXX. 
 
 The Horse. 
 
 The horse is a noble and useful animal. He can walk, trot, 
 or run, and at the same time carry a man on his back. The 
 rider governs him by signs which he makes with the bit, his 
 foot, or the whip. 
 
 Horses are sometimes used for drawing wagons, and carts ; 
 sometimes for drawing coaches ; sometimes for ploughing the 
 fields ; sometimes for running, or •hunting ; and sometimes 
 they are used in war. 
 
 A horse knows his own stable, he distinguishes his compan- 
 ions, remembers any place at which he has once stopped, and 
 will find his way by a road which he has travelled. 
 
 There is a great difference in horses, both in size and beau- 
 ty ; both in strength and fleetness. The most beautiful horses 
 in the world, it is said, are found in Arabia. 
 
 In some parts of the world, horses run wild, and are found 
 in droves of several hundred together. They run very fast, 
 and defend themselves from other animals, either by biting, 
 kicking, or striking with their forefeet. 
 
 A colt is a young horse, and is very fond of play. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 141 
 
 SECTION LXXXI. 
 
 Sheep and Lambs. 
 
 Here is the picture of some fine sheep, and some beautiful 
 little lambs ; see how they skip and play about on the green 
 grass ! The sheep is a very useful animal, and is found in al- 
 most all parts of the world. 
 
 The flesh of the sheep is very good food; it is called mut- 
 ton. The sheep furnishes us with wool, from which our warm 
 clothes are made : and the skin is used for covering books. 
 
 Sheep are timid animals, and derive their safety from the 
 care of man ; and they well repay him for his attention. In 
 some countries they require the attendance of shepherds, and 
 are penned up at night to protect them from the wolves. 
 
 Wolves are very much like dogs in their appearance, but 
 they are wild ; and when they are hungry, will kill sheep and 
 lambs, and eat them. There are but few wolves in this coun- 
 try, for men take great pains to kill them. 
 
 Men at all times, and in almost all countries have taken 
 much care of sheep. Sheep and shepherds are often mention- 
 ed in the bible. 
 
142 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LXXXII. 
 
 The Elephant* 
 
 Here we have the picture of an elephant ; which is the 
 largest and strongest of all quadrupeds. In its wild state, it 
 is neither fierce nor mischievous ; but mild and brave : it ex- 
 erts its powers only in its own defence, or in that of the com- 
 pany to which it belongs. 
 
 The elephant has a rough skin, of a dark colour, with but 
 little hair upon it. He has small eyes, but they are bright and 
 penetrating. HjS great ears are flat ; and he sometimes moves 
 them like a fan, to drive away dust and insects from his eyes. 
 
 His legs are suited to the size of his body, being strong and 
 massy. The trunk or proboscis is composed of muscles en- 
 tirely at the will of the animal. He can move or bend it, 
 lengthen, contract, or twist it in any direction. 
 
 The end of the trunk is formed in such a manner, that he 
 can pick up a small piece of money with it, untie knots, open and 
 shut gates, and draw corks from bottles. With his trunk he 
 gathers his food, puts it into his mouth, and draws up water to 
 quench his thirst. 
 
 When the elephant is once tamed, it is the most gentle and 
 obedient of all animals. Its attachment to its keeper is remark- 
 able, and it seems to live but to serve and obey him. It de- 
 lights in music, and is much pleased with the sound of a trump- 
 et and drum. Elephants live more than one hundred years. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 143 
 
 SECTION LXXXIII. 
 
 The Whale. 
 
 The whale is the largest of all animals that have yet been 
 discovered. The length of a full grown whale, may be stated 
 as varying from fifty to one hundred feet. 
 
 The head of the whale is very large in proportion to the 
 size of the body : its eyes are very small, being little larger 
 than those of an ox, and situated on each side of the head. Its 
 tail is its principal weapon, with which he can upset a boat, or 
 dash it in pieces. 
 
 Immediately beneath the skin lies the blubber or fat, which 
 is from eight to twenty inches thick. It is for this and the 
 whalebone that this animal is deemed so valuable ; and for 
 which it is so much sought for by whale -fishers. 
 
 A large whale yields more than one hundred barrels of oil, 
 and a ton and a half of whalebone. The flesh of the whale 
 is sometimes eaten by the inhabitants that live along the coasts 
 where they are taken. 
 
 There seems to be an analogy between the whale and the 
 elephant ; for both are the strongest and largest animals in 
 their respective elements, which are never to be dreaded, un- 
 less injured or provoked. 
 
144 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION LXXXIV. 
 
 Insects. 
 
 Here we have the picture of a variety of insects : how 
 pleasing on a fine summer's day to see these curious little 
 creatures on the wing ! We meet with them every where in 
 our walks, and in our houses. 
 
 There are but very few insects that can hurt us. Some of 
 them have stings, but they are not disposed to use them, unless 
 we hurt or disturb them. 
 
 Insects are the food of a great many birds. Birds are use- 
 ful to us ; therefore, insects, which supply so many birds with 
 food, must be useful also. 
 
 The little ants are the food of many creatures, and Provi- 
 dence has ordained that they should be a most numerous tribe 
 of insects. 
 
 Some insects are of very great use to man. The honey- 
 bee furnishes us with honey, and wax ; and the silk- worm 
 spins our silk. 
 
 Some insects, when they become very numerous, do great 
 injury : they sometimes destroy vegetation, and the fruits of 
 the earth. 
 
 But it is more agreeable to consider them as a beautiful and 
 curious part of the creation, furnishing an inexhaustible source 
 of rational amusement ; and proclaiming the wisdom of the 
 Creator, as clearly, as the largest elephant that ranges the for- 
 est, or the most huge whale that ploughs the ocean. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 145 
 
 SECTION LXXXV. 
 
 Rules and Examples for spelling Derivative 
 
 Words. 
 
 When the termination ed is preceded by t or d, it always 
 forms an additional syllable ; but when preceded by any other 
 letter, the e is generally silent, and the d added to the foregoing 
 syllable, or the sound of d changed to t 9 which is added to 
 the foregoing syllable : thus, print-ed, loved, mixed, are pro- 
 nounced print' -ed lovd, mixt, &c* 
 
 The following Rules and Examples, which were first published by 
 the author in 1831, are given in this place, for the purpose of teach- 
 ing more extensively the orthography of derivative words. Those 
 inserted under the following rules, are not generally to be found in 
 dictionaries, and are often spelled improperly ; and that too by those 
 who are experienced in writing. We often see the plural of chimney 
 spelled chimnies, instead of chimneys; monies, instead of moneys; at- 
 tornies, instead of attorneys. We sometimes see the derivatives of 
 such words as emit, spelled emiting, emited, instead of emitting, emit- 
 ted; abhoring, abhored, instead of abhorring, abhorred. Sometimes 
 from limit, we see the derivatives written limitting, limitted. instead 
 of limiting, limited ; from ballot, ballotting, ballotted, instead of ballot- 
 ing, balloted, &c. But if proper attention is paid to the following 
 rules and examples, the learner will readily acquire a correct knowl- 
 edge of them, which will serve as a complete guide to the spelling of 
 derivative words throughout the language ; and correct many of the 
 gross irregularities so common among writers. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 Monosyllables, and words accented on the last syllable, ending with 
 a single consonant, preceded by a single vowel, double the final con- 
 sonant when they assume another syllable beginning with a vowel, f 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 Bed 
 
 bed-ding 
 
 bed-ded 
 
 blot 
 
 blot- ting 
 
 blot-ted 
 
 blur 
 
 blur-ring 
 
 blurred 
 
 chop 
 
 chop-ping 
 
 chopped 
 
 chat 
 
 chat-ting 
 
 chat-ted 
 
 crop 
 
 crop-ping 
 
 cropped 
 
 dun 
 
 dun-ning 
 
 dunned 
 
 dot 
 
 dot-ting 
 
 doUted 
 
 hem 
 
 hem-ming 
 
 hemmed 
 
 hop 
 
 hop-ping 
 
 hopped 
 
 mud 
 
 mud-ding 
 
 mud-ded 
 
 rob 
 
 rob-bing 
 
 robbed 
 
 rap 
 
 rap-ping 
 
 rapped 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 tip 
 
 tip-ping 
 
 tipped 
 
 an-nul 
 
 an-nul-ling 
 
 an-nulled 
 
 wed 
 
 wed-ding 
 
 wed-ded 
 
 con-cui 
 
 * con-cur-ring 
 
 con-curred 
 
 wrap 
 
 wrap-ping 
 
 wrapped 
 
 o-mit 
 
 o-mit-ting 
 
 o-mit-ted 
 
 * Scripture language, and adjectives not derived from verbs, as na- 
 ked, wicked, are exceptions. 
 
 t When an additional syllable chaDges the original accent, the fi 
 nal consonant is not doubled. 
 
 18 
 
146 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 2 2 2 2 2 2 
 
 out- wit out-wit- ting out- wit-ted 
 
 un-ship un-ship-pingun-shipped 
 
 re-fit re-fit-ting re-fit-ted 
 
 5 5 5 
 
 re-gret re-gret-ting re-gret-ted 
 
 al-lot al-lot-ting al-lot-ted 
 
 re-mit re-mit-ting re-mit-ted 
 
 be-sot be-sot-ting be-sot-ted 
 
 tre-pan tre-pan-ningtre-panned 
 
 be-spot be-spot-ting be -spot-ted 
 
 un-fit un-fit-ting un-fit-ted 
 
 un-clog un-clog-ging un-clogged 
 
 un-pin un-pin-ning un-pinned 
 
 un-stop un-stop-ping un-stopped 
 
 Exception. — When the primitive ends in x, the final consonant is 
 
 not doubled in forming derivatives. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 2 2 2 2 2 2 
 
 Fix fix-ing fixed 
 
 an-nex an-nex-ing an-nexed 
 
 tax tax-ing taxed 
 
 per-plex per-plex-ing per-plexed 
 
 vex vex-ing vexed 
 
 pre-fix pre-fix-ing pre-fixed 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 Words ending with a single consonant preceded by a diphthong, 
 
 do not double the final consonant when they assume another syllable. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Ill oi oi oi 
 
 Aid aid-ing aid-ed 
 
 broil broil-ing broiled 
 
 aim aim-ing aimed 
 
 foil foil-ing foiled 
 
 bait bait-ing bait-ed 
 
 toil toil-ing toiled 
 
 bloat bloat-ing bloat-ed 
 
 ou ou ou 
 
 cheer cheer-ing cheered 
 
 loud loud-er loud-est 
 
 fail fail-ing failed 
 
 proud proud-er proud-est 
 
 rain rain-ing rained 
 
 sour sour-er sour-est 
 
 roam roam-ing roamed 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 train train-ing trained 
 
 be-wail be-wail-ing be-wailed 
 
 wail wail-ing wailed 
 
 con-geal con-geal-ing con-gealed 
 
 dear dear er dear-est 
 
 con-tain con-tain-ing con-tained 
 
 meek mee &-er meek-est 
 
 pro-ceed pro-ceed-ing pro-ceed-ed 
 
 sweet sweeper sweet-est 
 
 re-peat re-peat-ing re-peat-ed 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 Words endin/v with a consonant, preceeded by another consonant, 
 
 do not double t>*e final letter when they take an additional syllable. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 2 2 2 2 2 5 
 
 Act act-ing act-ed 
 
 as-sist as-sist-ing as-sist-ed 
 
 blend blend-in* blend-ed 
 
 con-sent con-sent-ing con-sent-ed 
 
 churn churn-ing churned 
 
 con-tend con-tend-ing con-tend-ed 
 
 hunt hunt-ing hunt-ed 
 
 cor-rect cor-rect-ing corwect-ed 
 
 hint hint-ing hint-ed 
 
 de-fend de-fend-ing de-fend-ed 
 
 jest jest-ing jest-ed 
 
 dis-turb dis-turb-ing dis-turbed 
 
 jump mmp-ing jumped 
 land land-ing land-ed 
 
 en-list en-list-ing en-list-ed 
 
 ex-tend ex-tend-ing ex-tend-ed 
 
 lisp lisp-ing lisped 
 
 in-sist in-sist-ing in-sist-ed 
 
 print print-ing print-ed 
 
 re-turn re-turn-ing re-turned 
 
 rest rest-ing rest-ed 
 
 un-pack un-pack-ing un-packed 
 
 test test-ing test-ed 
 
 u-surp u-5urp-ing u-surped 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 147 
 
 RULE IV, 
 
 Words ending with a consonant, when the accent is on a prece- 
 ding syllable, do not double the final letter when they take another 
 syllable. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 2 3 3 3 
 
 bal-lot-ed Al-ter al-ter-ing al-tered 
 buf-fet-ed au-dit au-dit-ing au-dit-ed 
 mer-it-ed or-der or-der-ing or-dered 
 pil-fered 5 5 5 
 
 fod-der fod-der-ing fod-dered 
 
 pon-der 
 
 prof-fer 
 
 prof-it 
 2 
 
 in-her-it 
 
 Exception, — When words of this class end with Z, the I is doubled 
 in the derivatives.* 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 2 
 Bal-lot 
 buf-fet 
 mer-it 
 pil-fer 
 quiv-er 
 riv-et 
 scat-ter 
 suf-fer 
 ut-ter 
 vis-it 
 
 bal-lot-ing 
 buf-fet-ing 
 mer-it-ing 
 pil-fer-ing m 
 quiv-er-ing quiv-ered 
 riv-et-ing riv-et-ed 
 scat-ter-ing scat-iered 
 suf-fer-ing suf-fered 
 ut-ter-ing ut-tered 
 vis-it-ing vis-it-ed 
 
 pon-der-ing pon-dered 
 prof-fer-ing prof-fered 
 prof-it-ing prof-it-ed 
 
 2 2 
 
 in-her-it-ins in-her-it-ed 
 
 1 
 Du-el 
 e-qual 
 li-bel 
 ri-val 
 
 2 
 bar-rel 
 can-eel 
 cav-il 
 
 1 
 du-el-ling 
 e-qual-ling 
 li-bel-ling 
 ri-val-ling 
 
 2 
 bar-rel-ling 
 can-cel-ling 
 cav-il-ling 
 
 du-elkd 
 e-qualkd 
 li-belkd 
 ri-valkd 
 2 
 
 bar- relied 
 ean-eelkd 
 cav-ilkd 
 
 RULE 
 
 2 2 
 
 grav-el grav-el-ling 
 lev-el lev-el-ling 
 rav-el-ling 
 rev-el-ling 
 sniv-el-ling 
 tin-sel-ling 
 
 rav-el 
 
 rev-el 
 
 sniv-el 
 
 tin-sel 
 
 trav-el 
 
 tun-nel 
 
 V. 
 
 grav-elkd 
 
 lev-elkd 
 
 rav-elkd 
 
 rev-elkd 
 
 sniv-elkd 
 
 tin-selkd 
 
 trav - el-ling trav-elkd 
 tun-nel-ling tun-nelkd 
 
 When words ending in y preceded by a consonant, 
 additional termination beginning with a vowel, the y 
 into i ; except when ing is added, in which case the y 
 that i may not be doubled. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 1 
 ho-li-est 
 la-zi-est 
 live-li-est 
 de-i-fkd 
 no-ti-fkd 
 
 assume an 
 is changed 
 is retained, 
 
 1 1 
 
 Ho-ly ho-li-er 
 
 la -zy la-zi-er 
 
 li\ e-ly live-li-er 
 
 de-i-fy de-i-fy-ing 
 
 no-ti-fy no-ti-fy-ing . 
 
 pu-ri-fy pu-ri-fy-ing pu-ri-fkd 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 pit-y pit-y-ing pit-kd 
 
 ral-ly ral-ly-ing ral-lkd 
 
 stud-y stud-y-ing stud-kd 
 
 hap-py hap-pi-er hap-pi-est 
 
 2 
 heav-y 
 mer-ry 
 mud-dy 
 ed-i-fy 
 
 2 
 he&v-i-er 
 mer-ri-er 
 mud-di-er 
 ed-i-fy-ing 
 jus-ti-fy jus-ti-fy-ing 
 sat-is-fy sat-is-fy-ing 
 tes-ti-fy tes-ti-fy-ing 
 
 8 8 
 
 blood-y blood-i-er 
 come-ly come-li-er 
 love-ly love-li-er 
 
 heav-i-est 
 
 mer-ri-est 
 
 mud-di-est 
 
 ed-i-fkd 
 
 jus-ti-fkd 
 
 sat-is-fkd 
 
 tes-ti-fkd 
 
 8 
 blood-i-est 
 comc-li-est 
 love-li-est 
 
 * Some writers are of opinion that this exception ought not to be made, 
 and that these words should be spelled with but one I according to the gene- 
 ra] rule. 
 
i!48 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 but-ter-fly 
 
 des-ti-ny 
 
 en-e-my 
 
 his-to-ry 
 
 lib-er-ty 
 
 but-ter-flies 
 
 des-ti-nies 
 
 en-e-mies 
 
 his-to-ries 
 
 libber-ties 
 
 a-cad-e-my 
 
 ca-lam-i-ty 
 
 fes-tiv-i-ty 
 
 in-dem-ni-ty 
 
 so-lem-ni-ty 
 
 a-cad-e-mies 
 
 ca-lam-i-ties 
 
 fes-tiv-i-ties 
 
 in-dem-ni-ties 
 
 so-lem-ni-ties 
 
 RULE VI. 
 
 When a termination is added to a word ending with y, preceded 
 by a vowel, the y is retained in the derivative.* 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 1 
 
 Al-lay 
 
 ar-ray 
 
 be-tray 
 
 de-cay 
 
 de-fray 
 
 de-lay 
 
 1 
 al-lay-ing 
 ar-ray-ing 
 be-tray-ing 
 de-cay-ing 
 de-fray-ing 
 de-lay-ing 
 
 1 
 al-layed 
 ar-rayed 
 be-trayed 
 de-cayed 
 de-frayed 
 de-layed 
 
 dis-play dis-play-ing dis-played 
 
 9 9 9 
 
 con-vey con-vey-ing con-veyed 
 
 pur-vey pur-vey-ing pur-veyed 
 
 sur-vey sur-vey-ing sur-veyed 
 
 o-bey o-bey-ing o-beyed 
 
 oy oy oy 
 
 an-noy an-noy-ing an-noyed 
 de-stroy de-stroy-ing de-stroyed 
 
 clay 
 
 day 
 
 2 
 
 ab-bey 
 
 al-ley 
 
 chim-ney 
 
 en-voy 
 
 1 
 bays 
 clays 
 days 
 2 
 
 ab-beys 
 al-leys 
 chim-neys 
 en-voys 
 
 2 
 
 gal-ley 
 jour-ney 
 kid-ney 
 val-ley 
 
 5 
 vol-ley 
 
 8 
 mon-ey 
 
 2 
 gal-leys 
 
 i'our-neys 
 :id-neys 
 val-leys 
 
 5 
 vol-leys 
 
 8 
 mon-eys 
 
 RULE VII. 
 
 Words ending with double letters, taking an additional syllable, 
 generally preserve the letters double. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 1 
 gross 
 
 2 
 bless 
 dress 
 
 1 
 
 guess 
 
 kiss 
 
 press 
 
 puff 
 
 snuff 
 
 stiff 
 
 gross-er 
 
 2 
 bless-ing 
 dress-ing 
 gness-ing 
 kiss-ing 
 press-ing 
 puff-ing 
 snuff-ing 
 stiff-er 
 
 gross-est 
 
 2 
 blessed 
 dressed 
 gwessed 
 kissed 
 pressed 
 puffed 
 snuffed 
 stiff-est 
 
 2 
 as-sess 
 
 2 2 
 
 as-sess-ing as-sessed 
 ca-ress ca-ress-ing ca-ressed 
 con-fess con-fess-ing con-fessed 
 de-press de-press-ing de-pressed 
 di-gress di-gress-ing di-gressed 
 dis-cuss dis-cuss-ing dis-cussed 
 dis-tress dis-tress-ing dis-tressed 
 ex-press ex-press-ing ex-pressed 
 pro-fess pro-fess-ing pro-fessed 
 re-press re-press-ing re-pressed 
 
 Exception. — Some words ending with double l t and taking an 
 additional syllable beginning with a consonant, omit one I; as, skill, 
 skilfully skilfulness. 
 
 ♦ Lay, pa' and say, from which are derived laid, paid, and said, 
 are exceptions to this rule. 
 
f — mm — — — 1 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 149 
 
 RULE VIII. 
 
 
 When ing is added to words ending with silent e, the e is omitted ; 
 
 but in forming the perfect participle, the e is 
 added. 
 
 retained, and d only is 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 
 Ill 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 Cease ceas-ing ceased 
 
 de-cide 
 
 de-ci-ding de-ci-ded 
 
 praise prais-ing praised 
 
 de-face 
 
 de-fa-cing de-faced 
 
 raise rais-ing raised 
 
 de-fine 
 
 de-fi-ning de-fined 
 
 range rang-ing ranged 
 
 de-vise 
 
 de-vi-sing de- vised 
 
 seize seiz-ing seized 
 
 de-vote 
 
 de-vo-ting de-vo-ted 
 
 waste wast-ing wast-ed 
 
 di-vide 
 
 di-vi-ding di-vi-ded 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 e-vade 
 
 e-va-ding e-va-ded 
 
 bab-ble bab-bling bab-bled 
 
 ex-pire 
 
 ex-pi-ring ex-pired 
 
 baf-fle baf-fling baf-fled 
 
 in-cite 
 
 in-ci-ting in-ci-ted 
 
 C0up-le coup-ling coup-led 
 
 pro- vide 
 
 pro-vi-ding pro-vi-ded 
 
 crip-ple crip-pling crip-pled 
 
 re-fine 
 
 re-fi-ning re-fined 
 
 daz-zle daz-zling daz-zled 
 
 re-fuse 
 
 re-fu-sing re-fused 
 
 han-dle han-dling han-dled 
 
 re-fute 
 
 re-fu-ting re-fu-ted 
 
 RULE IX. 
 
 
 Primitive words ending with a diphthong, preserve both vowels in 
 
 forming their derivatives. 
 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 
 11 15 
 
 5 5 
 
 Crow? crow-ing crowed 
 
 bor-row 
 
 bor-row-ing bor-rowed 
 
 flow flow-ing flowed 
 
 hol-low 
 
 hol-low-ing hol-lowed 
 
 glow glow-ing glowed 
 
 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 grow grow-ing growed 
 
 re-new 
 
 re-new-ing re-newed 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 re- view 
 
 re-view-ing re-viewed 
 
 bel -low bel-low-ing bel-lowed 
 
 our 
 
 010 010 
 
 bur-row bur-row-ing bur-rowed 
 
 al-low 
 
 al-low-ing al-lowed 
 
 har-row har-row-ing har-rowed 
 
 a-vow 
 
 a-vow-ing a-vowed 
 
 mel-low mel-low-ing mel-lowed 
 
 en-dow 
 
 en-dow-ing en-dowed 
 
 Exception. — When ing is added to words 
 
 ending with i«, the final 
 
 e is omitted, and i changed to y ; but in forming the perfect participle,- 
 
 the e is retained, and d only is added. 
 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 
 1111 
 
 1 1 
 
 Die dy-ing died 1 tie 
 
 ty-ing tied 
 
 lie ly-mg lied | vie 
 
 vy-ing vied 
 
 RULE X. 
 
 
 Derivative words, forming the plural number of nouns, are generally 
 
 formed by adding s or es to the singular. 
 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 
 11 11 
 
 1 1 
 
 Cake cakes door doors 
 
 heap heaps | 
 name names 
 
 chain chains | floor floors 
 
 * ""■"■"' ■ ■ 13* 
 
 
 
150 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 II 
 
 11 2 2 2 2 
 
 side sides bridge bridg-es church church-es 
 
 slave slaves dunce dun-ces dress dress-es 
 
 year years fence fen-ces press press~es 
 
 grace gra-ces judge judg-es sash sash-es 
 
 fleece flee-ces purse pur-ses stitch stitfch-es 
 
 force for-ces quince quin-ces wish wish-es 
 
 niece nie-ces wedge wedg-es witeh wi£ch-es 
 
 Exceptions. — The principal nouns, the plurals of which are not 
 formed by the foregoing rules, are comprised in the following list 
 
 Beau 
 
 caZf 
 
 child 
 
 foot 
 
 &nife 
 
 leaf 
 
 loaf 
 
 beaux 
 
 calves 
 
 chil-dren 
 
 feet 
 
 knives 
 
 leaves 
 
 loaves 
 
 life 
 
 louse 
 
 mouse 
 
 ox 
 
 sheaf 
 
 shelf 
 
 staff 
 
 lives 
 
 lice 
 
 mice 
 
 ox-en 
 
 sheaves 
 
 shelves 
 
 staves 
 
 thieves 
 teeth 
 wives 
 broth-ers ) 
 breth-ren ) 
 penknife pen-knives 
 pen-ny pence 
 
 thief 
 tooth 
 wife 
 
 broth-er 
 
 SECTION LXXXV. 
 
 Examples of Prefixes and Suffixes. 
 
 The rules for spelling derivative words, given in the preceding sec- 
 tion, apply to those contained in this section likewise ; and to all 
 others in the language. The examples here given, are, to show the 
 various changes produced in the meaning of words, by prefixing or 
 adding other syllables to them. The learner must remember that 
 the same modifications apply, not only to those inserted in each ex- 
 ample here, but to all similar words in the language. 
 
 A prefix, is one or more syllables prefixed to a word, to vary its sig. 
 nification : as, appear, to be in sight ; dis-appear, to vanish ; re- 
 appear, to appear again. 
 
 A suffix, is one or more syllables added to a word, to vary its sig- 
 nification : BS,joy, gladness ; joy-ful, full of joy ; joy-ful-ness, state of 
 being joyful 
 
 EXAMPLE I. 
 
 Words formed by prefixing dis, and re. 
 Dis, prefixed to words, signifies privation, disunion ; and 
 sometimes negation. 
 
 Re, means back, again, or repetition. 
 
 Ap pear 
 
 to be in sight. 
 
 Ap point 
 
 to fix, establish. 
 
 Com pose 
 
 to form ; to quiet. 
 
 In ter 
 
 to bv,ry. 
 
 dis-ap pear 
 
 to vanish. 
 
 dis-ap point 
 
 to defeat, balk. 
 
 dis-com pose 
 
 to disorder ; disturb. 
 
 dis-in ter 
 
 to take out of a grave. 
 
 re-ap pear 
 
 to appear again. 
 
 re-ap point 
 
 to appoint again. 
 
 re-com pose 
 
 to form, or quiet anew. 
 
 re-in ter 
 
 to bury again. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 151 
 
 Em bark 
 
 to enter on shipboard. 
 
 En gage 
 
 to enlist ; to bind. 
 
 Pos sess 
 
 to have as an owner. 
 
 U nite 
 
 to join] to adhere. 
 
 Em bod y 
 
 to form into a body. 
 
 Or gan ize 
 
 to construct. 
 
 In her it 
 
 to receive by inherit' 
 ance. 
 
 dis-em bark 
 
 to go on shore. 
 
 dis-en gage 
 
 to separate ; to free. 
 
 dis-pos sess 
 
 to put out of possession. 
 
 dis-u nite 
 
 to separate, divide. 
 
 dis-em bod y 
 
 to divest of the body. 
 
 dis-or gan ize 
 
 to derange. 
 
 dis-in her it 
 
 to deprive of inherit- 
 ance. 
 
 re-em bark 
 
 to embark again. 
 
 re-en gage 
 
 to engage again. 
 
 re-pos sess 
 
 to possess agai/t.. 
 
 re-u nite 
 
 to join again. 
 
 re-em bod y 
 
 to embody again. 
 
 re-or gan ize 
 
 to organize again. 
 
 re-in her it 
 
 to inherit again. 
 
 EXAMPLE II. 
 
 Words formed by prefixing mis, pre, and re. 
 Mis, prefixed to a word, signifies wrong, erroneous. 
 Pre, denotes priority of time or rank. 
 Re, means again, or repetition, (as before.) 
 
 Call 
 
 to name. 
 
 Count 
 
 to number, reckon. 
 
 Form 
 
 to make. 
 
 Place 
 
 to put in place, fix. 
 
 Con duct 
 
 to lead, guide. 
 
 Judge 
 
 to decide. 
 
 Elect 
 
 to choose, select. 
 
 En gage 
 
 to enlist ; to employ. 
 
 Es tab lish 
 
 to fix, settle. 
 
 Ex am me 
 
 to search into, try. 
 
 mis-call 
 
 to call wrong. 
 
 mis-count 
 
 to reckon wrong. 
 
 mis-form 
 
 to form wrong. 
 
 mis-place 
 
 to place wrong. 
 
 mis-con duct 
 
 to conduct amiss. 
 
 pre-judge 
 
 to judge beforehand. 
 
 pre-e lect 
 
 to elect beforehand. 
 
 pre-en gage 
 
 to engage beforehand. 
 
 pre-es tab lish 
 
 to settle beforehand. 
 
 Pre- ex am ine 
 
 re-call 
 
 to call again. 
 
 re-count 
 
 to count again. 
 
 re-form 
 
 to form anew. 
 
 re-place 
 
 to put again in place. 
 
 re-con duct 
 
 to conduct back. 
 
 re-judga 
 
 to judge again. 
 
 re-e lect 
 
 to elect again. 
 
 re-en gage 
 
 to engage again. 
 
 re-es tab lish 
 
 to establish again. 
 
 re-ex am ine 
 
 to examine beforehand, to examine again. 
 
152 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 EXAMPLE III. 
 
 Words formed by prefixing over, counter, ante, and post. 
 Over, denotes excess, or superiority. 
 Counter, means against, or opposite. 
 Ante, signifies before. Post, signifies after. 
 
 Act 
 
 to do, perform; to imi- 
 tate. 
 
 Bal ance 
 
 to make equal ; settle. 
 
 Voise 
 
 to weigh. 
 
 Date 
 
 to note the time of an 
 act or event. 
 
 Di lu vi an 
 
 relating to the 
 deluge. 
 
 Me rid i an 
 
 mid-day, noon. 
 
 o ver-act 
 
 to do or perform to ex- 
 cess. 
 
 o ver-bal ance 
 
 to exceed in weight or 
 value. 
 
 coun ter-act 
 
 to act in opposition ; 
 
 to hinder. 
 coun ter-bal ance 
 to weigh or balance 
 
 o ver-poise 
 
 to outweigh. 
 
 an te-date 
 
 to date before the true 
 time. 
 
 against. 
 
 coun ter-poise 
 
 to equal, to balance. 
 
 post-date 
 
 to date later than the 
 real time. 
 
 an te-di lu vi an post-di lu vi an 
 
 existing before the existing after the 
 
 deluge. deluge. 
 
 an te-me rid i an post-me rid i an 
 
 being before noon. being after noon. 
 
 EXAMPLE IV. 
 Words formed by prefixing in, un, im, il, ir, and ig.* 
 
 In and un, prefixed to words, generally mean not, negation, 
 or privation. 
 
 1m, il, ir, and ig, which are substituted for in, signify the 
 same. 
 
 Ac tive in-ac tive 
 
 quick ; busy. not active. 
 
 Clem ent in-clement 
 
 mild, merciful, not clement. 
 
 De cent in-de cent 
 
 fit, becoming, not decent. 
 
 Ho ly un-ho ly 
 
 pure, sacred. wicked, not pure. 
 
 Ea sy un-ea sy 
 
 quiet, not difficult, not easy. 
 
 Mor al im-mor al 
 
 virtuous. viscious. 
 
 * These prefixes, in some few words, add intensity of meaning to the 
 primitive words ; as press, to squeeze ; im-press, to press in or on : 
 fold, to double ; in-fold, to fold in : radiate, to emit rays ; ir-radiate y 
 to emit more rays. 
 
 Un, sometimes means, undoing: as fold, to double ; un-fold, to undo 
 the folding : lock, to fasten ; un-lock, to open a lock. 
 
 In, when the word has a negative meaning, and will admit of it, is 
 mostly used, and is considered preferable. 
 
IP 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 153 
 
 Mor tal 
 
 subject to death. 
 
 Per feet 
 
 faultless, pure. 
 
 Prop er 
 
 fit, peculiar. 
 
 No ble 
 
 dignified, brave. 
 
 im-mor tal 
 
 never dying. 
 
 im-perfect 
 
 defective, not pure. 
 
 im-prop er 
 
 not proper. 
 
 ig-no b\e 
 
 mean, worthless. 
 
 Le gal il-le gal 
 
 lawful. unlawful. 
 
 Lib er al il-lib er al 
 
 generous, free, not liberal. 
 
 Reg u lar ir-reg u lar 
 
 exact, orderly. not regular. 
 
 Res o lute ir-res o lute 
 
 firm, bold. wavering. 
 
 EXAMPLE V. 
 
 Prefixes, which are applied to but few words in the language. 
 Semij hemi, and demi, mean half. 
 Anti, means against, or opposed to. 
 Circum, signifies around. 
 Super, denotes excess, over, or above* 
 Non, signifies not ; or gives to words a negative meaning. 
 
 Sphere hem i-sphere 
 
 a globe, orb. half of a globe. 
 
 Cir c\e sem i-cir cle 
 
 a round figure, half of a, circle. 
 
 An nu al sem i-an nu al 
 
 yearly. half yearly. 
 
 Pa pal an ti-pa pal 
 
 belonging to the opposing popery, 
 pope. 
 
 Feb rile an ti-feb rile 
 
 partaking offe- good against fe* 
 ver. vers. 
 
 NaV i gate circum-nav igate 
 
 to sail. to sail round. 
 
 Add su per-add 
 
 to subjoin, in- to add over and 
 crease. above. 
 
 Fine su per-fine 
 
 not coarse. eminently fine. 
 
 Hu man super-hu man 
 having the quali- above what is 
 ties of a man. human. 
 
 Appearance non-appearance 
 
 coming in neglect of ap- 
 
 sight. pearing. 
 
 Res i dence non-res i dence 
 residing in a not residing in 
 place. a place. 
 
 The following prefixes denote number : hi, tri, tetra, penta, sex, hexa, 
 sept, hepta, oct, octa, dec, deca, cent. 
 Bi-en ni al, lasting, or being every two years. 
 Tri-en ni al, lasting, or being every three years. 
 Sex-en ni al, lasting, or being every six years. 
 Sep-ten ni al, lasting, or being every seven years. 
 Oc-ten ni al, lasting, or being every eight years. 
 De-cen ni al, lasting, or being every ten years. 
 Cen-ten ni al, lasting, or being every one hundred years. 
 Tet ra-gon, a square, or four-sided figure. 
 Pen ta-gon, a figure of five sides or angles. 
 Hex a-gon, a figure of six sides or angles. 
 Hep ta-gon, a figure of seven sides or angles. 
 Oc ta-gon, a figure of eight sides or angles. 
 Dec a-gon, a figure of ten sides or angles. 
 
154 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 
 EXAMPLE VI. 
 
 
 Words formed by adding ful 
 
 , and less. 
 
 Ful, added 
 
 to a word, denotes abundance. 
 
 Less, means without, or wanting. 
 
 
 Fear 
 
 fear-ful 
 
 fear-less 
 
 to be afraid of. 
 
 full of fear. 
 
 without fear. 
 
 Help 
 
 help-ful 
 
 help-less 
 
 to aid, assist. 
 
 affording aid. 
 
 mirth-ful 
 
 without help. 
 
 Mirth 
 
 mirth-less 
 
 merriment. 
 
 full of mirth. 
 
 without mirth. 
 
 1 Pain 
 
 pain-ful 
 
 pain-less 
 
 distress. 
 
 full of pain. 
 
 without pain. 
 
 Thought 
 
 thowg-At-ful 
 
 thong-At-less 
 
 act of thinking. 
 
 full of thought. 
 
 careless, heedless. 
 
 Mer cy 
 
 mer ci-ful 
 
 mer ci-less 
 
 tenderness 'forgiveness, full of mercy. 
 
 without mercy. 
 
 Pow er 
 
 pow er-ful 
 
 pow er-less 
 
 authority , force. 
 
 full of power. 
 
 EXAMPLE VII. 
 
 without power. 
 
 Words formed by adding ly, 
 
 and ness. 
 
 Ly, added to a word, means like, or in a manner. 
 
 Ness, denotes state or quality. 
 
 
 Base 
 
 base-ly 
 
 base-ness 
 
 mean, vile. 
 
 in a base manner. 
 
 meanness. 
 
 Brisk 
 
 brisk-ly 
 
 brisk-ness 
 
 lively, active. 
 
 actively. 
 
 liveliness. 
 
 Cheap 
 
 cheap-ly 
 
 cheap-ness 
 
 of low price. 
 
 at a low price. 
 
 lowness of price. 
 
 Pen sive 
 
 pen sive-ly 
 
 pen sive-ness 
 
 sorrowful. 
 
 sorrowfully. 
 
 melancholy. 
 
 Qui et 
 
 qui et-ly 
 
 qui et-ness 
 
 still, calm. 
 
 calmly, at rest. 
 
 rest, calmness. 
 
 Rap id 
 
 rap id-ly 
 
 rap id-ness 
 
 quick, swift. 
 
 quickly, swiftly. 
 
 quickness, swiftness. 
 
 
 EXAMPLE VIII. 
 
 Words formed by adding er,* or, ster, 
 
 ess, ress and stress 
 
 Er, or, and ster, denote the agent or performer of an action. 
 
 Ess, ress, 
 
 and stress, denote the female sex ; as poeUess, 
 
 act-ress, seam 
 
 ■stress. 
 
 
 * Er, when forming the comparison of adjectives, is an exception. 
 
 
 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 155 
 
 Act 
 
 to do, perform. 
 
 Hunt 
 
 to chase, search. 
 
 Seam 
 
 two edges united. 
 
 Song 
 
 a poem, a ballad. 
 
 Di rect 
 
 to order, address. 
 
 act-or 
 
 he that acts. 
 
 hunt-er 
 
 he that hunts. 
 
 seam-ster 
 
 one who sews. 
 
 song-ster 
 
 a singer. 
 
 di rect-or 
 
 one who directs. 
 
 act-ress 
 
 a female who acts. 
 
 hunt-ress 
 
 a female hunter. 
 
 seam-stress 
 
 a female who sews. 
 
 song-stress 
 
 a female singer. 
 
 di rect-ress 
 
 a female who directs. 
 
 EXAMPLE IX. 
 
 Words formed by adding able, ible, ily, ability, and ibility. 
 
 Able, or ible, added to a word,signifies worthy to be, or capa- 
 ble of being. 
 
 Ity, ability, or ibility, signifies the state, condition, or quality 
 of being. 
 
 ac cept-a ble 
 
 likely to be accept- 
 ed, pleasing. 
 
 ac cess-i ble 
 
 that which may be 
 approached. 
 
 ad mi-ra ble 
 
 worthy of being ad- 
 mired. 
 
 con form-a ble 
 
 like, suitable. 
 
 re sist-i ble 
 
 Ac cept 
 
 to receive, take, 
 admit. 
 
 Ac cess 
 
 admission, in- 
 crease. 
 
 Ad mire 
 
 to regard, esteem, 
 love. 
 
 Con form 
 
 to comply with. 
 
 Re sist 
 
 to oppose, to act 
 against. 
 
 that which may be 
 resisted. 
 
 ac cept-a bil i ty 
 
 the quality of being ac- 
 ceptable. 
 
 ac cess-i bil i ty 
 
 the quality of being ac- 
 cessible. 
 
 ad mi-ra bil i ty 
 
 the quality of being ad- 
 mired. 
 
 con form-i ty 
 
 compliance with. 
 
 re sist-i bil i ty 
 
 the quality of re- 
 sisting. 
 
 EXAMPLE X, 
 
 Words formed by adding ize, ist, and ism. 
 
 Ize, added to a word, means to make, assimilate, treat of, or 
 become. 
 
 1st, denotes a person skilled in, or devoted to, some art, sci- 
 ence or practice. 
 
 Ism, means doctrine, practice, or principles. 
 
 Dra ma 
 
 a play. 
 
 Mor al 
 
 virtuous, honest, 
 just. 
 
 dram a-tize 
 
 to represent in a drama. 
 
 mor al-ize 
 
 to speak or write on 
 morality. 
 
 dram a-tist 
 
 a writer of a drama. 
 
 mor al-ist 
 
 a teacher of morals ; 
 a moral man. 
 
1156 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 1 
 
 Sat ire 
 
 severe censure of vice 
 or folly. 
 
 Har mo ny 
 
 musical concord, 
 agreement. 
 
 Mag net 
 
 the loadstone, the stone 
 that attracts iron. 
 
 Mod ern 
 
 late, recent. 
 
 Pa gan 
 
 a heathen. 
 
 Sat ir-ize 
 
 to censure as in a 
 satire. 
 
 har mo-nize 
 
 to agree, to corres- 
 
 mag net-ize 
 
 to impart or receive 
 magnetism. 
 
 mod ern-ize 
 
 to render modern. 
 
 pa gan-ize 
 
 to render heathenish. 
 
 sat lr-ist 
 
 one who writes 
 satires. 
 
 har mo-nist 
 
 a musician ; a har- 
 monizer. 
 
 mag net-ism 
 
 the properties of the 
 magnet. 
 
 mod ern-ism 
 
 modern practice. 
 
 pa gan-ism 
 
 heathenism. 
 
 EXAMPLE XI. 
 
 Words formed by adding ive, and ion. 
 Ive, live, and sive, mean tending to, or having the power or 
 nature of. 
 
 Ion, Hon and sion, denote the act, or state of being. 
 
 Afflict 
 
 to give pain. 
 
 At tend 
 
 to wait on, listen. 
 
 Cre ate 
 
 to make, form. 
 
 Op press 
 
 to burden. 
 
 Re tain 
 
 to keep, to hold. 
 
 af flict-ive 
 
 giving pain, painful. 
 
 at ten-tive 
 
 heedful, regardful. 
 
 ere a-tive 
 
 having power to create. 
 
 Op press-ive 
 
 burdensome. 
 
 re ten-tive 
 
 able or apt to retain. 
 
 af flic-tion 
 
 being afflicted. 
 
 at ten-tion 
 
 act of attending. 
 
 ere a-tion 
 
 the act of creating. 
 
 op pres-sion 
 
 act of oppressing. 
 
 re ten-tion 
 
 act of retaining. 
 
 EXAMPLE XII. 
 
 Words formed by adding ous, al, ish, age, ance, ence, and ment. 
 
 Ous, and al, added to words, signify pertaining to, belonging 
 to, full of, or like. 
 
 Ish, means like, somewhat like, or in some degree like. 
 
 Age, denotes rank, state, condition, reward or possession. 
 
 Ment, ance, and ence, denote the act of, state of being, condi 
 Hon, or that which. 
 
 Haz ard 
 
 danger ; chance. 
 
 Mar vel 
 
 to wonder. 
 
 haz ard-ous 
 
 dangerous. 
 
 mar vel-ous 
 
 wonderful. 
 
 Ru in ru in-ous 
 
 destruction, destructive. 
 
 Ven om ven om-ous 
 
 poison. poisonous. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 157 
 
 Crime 
 
 an offence. 
 
 Doc trine 
 
 crim i-nal 
 
 wicked, faulty. 
 
 doc trin-al 
 
 precept, princi- containing doc- 
 pie ; teaching, trine. 
 
 form-al 
 
 Form 
 
 shape, figure ; 
 ceremony. 
 
 Frac tion 
 
 part of a whole 
 number 
 
 Black 
 
 dark; dismal. 
 
 Child 
 
 regular] cere- 
 monious. 
 
 frac tion-al 
 
 belonging to a 
 broken number. 
 
 black-ish 
 
 somewhat black. 
 
 child-ish 
 
 a young person, like a child. 
 
 Peer 
 
 a nobleman; an 
 asso date. 
 
 Per son 
 
 a man, woman, 
 or child. 
 
 Pupil 
 
 a scholar. 
 
 At tain 
 
 to gain. 
 
 Mer ry 
 
 gay, jovial. 
 
 Per form 
 
 to do, execute ; 
 to act a part. 
 
 Re pent 
 
 to exercise re- 
 pentance. 
 
 Oc cur 
 
 peer-age 
 
 dignity of a 
 peer. 
 
 per son-age 
 
 a person of dis- 
 tinction. 
 
 pu pil-age 
 
 state of a scholar. 
 
 at tam-ment 
 
 acquisition. 
 
 mer ri-ment 
 
 mirth. 
 
 perform-ance 
 
 act of performing ; 
 an action. 
 
 re pent-ance 
 
 sorrow for sin, peni- 
 tence. 
 
 Clown clown-ish 
 
 a rude person, rude, ill-bred. 
 
 Damp damp-ish 
 
 moist, ivatery. rather damp. 
 
 Pa rent parent-age 
 
 fatlier or molJier. birth, decent. 
 
 Promiscuous Exercises. 
 
 The words to be defined according to the explanations given in the 
 preceding examples. 
 
 oc cur rence 
 
 to come, appear, any event that hap- 
 happen. pens. 
 
 i 
 
 Joy, gladness. 
 joy-ful 
 
 joy.ful-ly 
 
 joy-ful-ness 
 
 joy-less 
 
 joy-less-ly 
 
 joy-less-ness 
 
 joy-ous 
 
 joy-ous-ly 
 
 joy-ous-ness 
 
 Act, to do, perform. 
 
 ac-tive 
 
 ac-tive-ly 
 
 ac-tive-ness 
 
 ac-tiv-i-ty 
 
 act-or 
 
 act-ress 
 
 ac-tion 
 
 ac-tion-a-ble 
 
 in-ac-tive 
 in-ac-tive-ly 
 in-ac-tiv-i-ty 
 in-ac-tion 
 re-act 
 re-ac-tion 
 o-ver-act 
 coun-ter-act 
 coun-ter-ac-tion 
 Legal, lawful, ac- 
 cording to law. 
 le-gaUy 
 le-gal-ize 
 le-gal-i-ty 
 il-le-gal 
 il-le-gal-ly 
 il-le-gal-ize 
 il-le-gal-i-ty 
 i]-le-gal-ness 
 
 — 14 
 
 Ac-cept, to take, re 
 
 ceive. 
 ac-cept-er 
 ac-cept-ance 
 ac-cept-a-tion 
 ac-cept-a-ble 
 ac-cept-a-bly 
 ac-cept-a-ble-ness 
 ac-cept-a-bil-i-ty 
 un-ac-cept-a-ble 
 Con-form, to comply 
 
 with ; make like, 
 con-form-er 
 con-form-ist 
 con-for-ma-tion 
 con-form-i-ty 
 con-form-a-ble 
 in-con-form-i-ty 
 non- con-form-ist fl 
 
158 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 non-con-form-i-ty in-cor-rupt-i-ble im-ma-ture 
 
 Cor-rupt, to infect, jn-cor-rupt-i-ble-ness im-ma-ture-ly 
 
 defile; vicious, «J-^-rupU-bd-i-ty lm . ma . t ure-ness 
 
 spoiled. Gov-ern, to rule, di- im-ma-tu-ri-ty 
 
 red, manage. pre-ma-ture 
 cor-rupt-er & , , 
 
 cor-rujt-ly gov-ern-or pre-ma-ture-ly 
 
 cor-rupt-ness gov-ern-ess pre-ma-ture-ness 
 
 cor.rujt-ive gov-ern-ment prerna-tu-ri-ty 
 
 cor.rup-tion gov-ern-ment-al ^fe \ havi ^ 
 
 cor.rupt-i.bl* gov-ern-a.ble a^ le ToV C arners. 
 
 cor.rupt.i-bly un-gov-ern-a-ble an . g ^.i ar . ly 
 
 cor-rupt-i-ble-ness mis-gov^rn an-gu-lar-i-ty 
 
 cor-rupt-i-bil-i-ty mis-gov-ern-ment bU 6 n . gu _ lm J 
 
 un-cor.rupt Mature, ripe ; com- tri-an-gu-lar 
 
 in-cor-rupt pkte ; to ripen, pent-an-gu-lar 
 
 in-cor-rupt-ive to perfect. sex-an-gu-lar 
 
 in-cor-rupt-ness ma-ture-ly sept-an-gu-lar 
 
 in-cor-rup-tion ma-tu-ri-ty oct-an-gu-lar 
 
 SECTION LXXXVII. 
 Brief introduction to the Arts and Sciences, including explana- 
 tions of some of the Phenomena of Nature. 
 
 Agriculture, the most useful and important of all pursuits, is 
 the knowledge of soils, and their proper adaptation and man- 
 agement for the production of food for man and beast. 
 
 Architecture is the art of planning and building all sorts of 
 edifices according to the best models. 
 
 Commerce is the art of exchanging one commodity for 
 another, by buying and selling, with a view to gain ; by which 
 one country participates in the productions of all others. 
 
 Sculpture is the art of carving or hewing stone, and other 
 hard substances, into images. 
 
 Painting is one of the fine arts ; and by a knowledge of the 
 principles of drawing, and the effects of colours, it teaches to 
 represent all sorts of objects. 
 
 Anatomy is the art of dissecting the human body when dead, 
 and of examining and arranging its component parts, in order 
 to discover the nature of diseases, and thereby promote the 
 knowledge of medicine and surgery. 
 
 Biography is the historical account of the lives of particular 
 men, and may be called the science of life and manners. 
 
 Chronology is the science of computing time, and distinguish- 
 
f 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 159 
 
 ing its parts, so as to determine what period has elapsed since 
 any memorable event. 
 
 Arithmetic is the art of computing by numbers : it consists 
 of four separate operations ; addition, subtraction, multiplica- 
 tion, and division. 
 
 History is a narrative of past events, relative to all ages and 
 nations. It is the guide of the statesman, and the favourite 
 study of the enlightened scholar. It is the common school of 
 mankind, equally open and useful to all. 
 
 Natural History includes a description of the forms and in. 
 stinct of animals, the growth and properties of vegetables, and 
 whatever else is connected with nature. 
 
 Botany is that part of natural history which treats of vegeta- 
 bles : it arranges them in their proper classes, and describes 
 their structure and use. 
 
 Cosmography is a description of the world, or the universe, 
 including the earth and infinite space. It divides itself into 
 two parts, geography and astronomy. 
 
 Geography is that science which makes us acquainted with 
 the constituent parts of the globe, and its distribution into land 
 and water. It also teaches us the limits, boundaries, and pecu- 
 liarities of countries. 
 
 Astronomy is that grand and sublime science which makes 
 us acquainted with the figures, distances, and revolutions of the 
 planetary bodies, and with the nature and extent of the uni- 
 verse. 
 
 Philosophy is the study of nature, of mind, and of morals, on 
 the principles of reason. 
 
 Logic is the art of employing reason efficaciously, in inqui- 
 ries after truth, and in communicating the result to others. 
 
 Poetry is the art or practice of writing poems, or pieces in 
 verse ; by arranging the words and syllables in such equal 
 order, as to produce that harmony which distinguishes it from 
 prose. Verse may be either blank or in rhyme. In blank 
 verse, the last words of the line do not correspond in sound, 
 as they do in rhyme. 
 
 Music is the science of harmony, produced by a combina- 
 nation of melodious sounds. 
 
 Air is a transparent, invisible, elastic fluid, encompassing the 
 globe to the height of several miles. It contains the principles 
 of life and vegetation ; and is found by experiment to be eight 
 hundred times lighter than water. 
 
100 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK* 
 
 Wind is a sensible agitation of the air, whereby a large 
 quantity flows in a current out of one region into another. 
 
 Clouds are vapours suspended in the air, from a quarter of 
 a mile to two miles high. A fog is a cloud which touches the 
 earth. 
 
 Dew is produced from extremely subtile particles of water 
 floating about in a calm and serene air, which being con- 
 densed by the coolness of night, fall to the earth in fine and 
 delicate rains. 
 
 Mists are a collection of vapours commonly rising from 
 marshes or rivers, and become more visible as the light of the 
 day decreases. When a mist ascends high in the air, it is 
 called a cloud. 
 
 Rain is produced from clouds, condensed, or run together by 
 the cold ; which, by their own weight, fall in drops of water. 
 When they fall with violence, they are supposed to be impelled 
 by the attraction of electricity. 
 
 Hail is merely drops of rain in a frozen state. It is formed 
 from rain, congealed by the coldness of the atmosphere, in its 
 descent. 
 
 The Rainbow is produced by the refraction and reflection of 
 the sun's beams from falling drops of rain. It can only be seen 
 when the spectator turns his back to the sun, and when it rains 
 on the opposite side. 
 
 Tides are the alternate flux and reflux of the sea, which 
 takes place about every six hours. 
 
 Thunder and Lightning are occasioned by the power called 
 electricity. Lightning consists of a stream of the electrical 
 fire or fluid, passing between the clouds and the earth ; and 
 the thunder is nothing more than the explosion with its echoes. 
 
 Thunder and Lightning bear the same relation to each 
 other, as the flash and the report of a cannon ; and by the 
 space of time which occurs between them in both cases, their 
 distance from a particular spot may be known, reckoning 1142 
 feet for every second. 
 
 An Earthquake is a sudden motion of the earth, supposed to 
 be caused by electricity, or by steam, generated in caverns of 
 the earth. 
 
 Religion is the worship offered to the Supreme Being, in a 
 manner that we conceive to be the most agreeable to his re- 
 vealed will, in order to procure his blessing in this life, and 
 happinesss in a future state. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 161 
 
 SECTION LXXXVIII. 
 
 ! NUMBERS. 
 
 Letters. Figures. Names. Letters. Figures. Names. 
 
 I . 1 - One 
 
 [ XX - 20 - Twenty 
 
 II - 2 - Two 
 
 XXX - 30 - Thirty 
 
 III - 3 - Three 
 
 XL - 40 - Forty 
 
 IV - 4 - Four 
 
 L - 50 - Fifty 
 
 V - 5 - Five 
 
 LX - 60 - Sixty 
 
 VI . 6 - Six 
 
 LXX - 70 - Seventy 
 
 VII - 7 - Seven 
 
 LXXX - 80 - Eighty 
 
 VIII - 8 - Eight 
 
 XC - 90 - Ninety 
 
 IX - 9 - Nine 
 
 C - 100 - 1 hundred 
 
 X - 10 - Ten 
 
 CC - 200 - 2 hundred 
 
 XI - 11 - Eleven 
 
 CCC - 300 - 3 hundred 
 
 XII - 12 - Twelve 
 
 CCCC - 400 - 4 hundred 
 
 XIII - 13 - Thirteen 
 
 D .500-5 hundred 
 
 XIV - 14 - Fourteen 
 
 DC - 600 - 6 hundred 
 
 XV - 15 - Fifteen 
 
 DCC - 700 - 7 hundred 
 
 XVI - 16 - Sixteen 
 
 DCCC - 800 - 8 hundred 
 
 XVII - 17 - Seventeen 
 
 DCCCC - 900 - 9 hundred 
 
 XVIII - 18 - Eighteen 
 
 M - 1000 - 1 thousand 
 
 XIX - 19 - Nineteen 
 
 MDCCCXXXIX - 1839 
 
 SECTION LXXXIX. 
 
 Abbreviations used in Writing. 
 
 A. Answer. ^ ^ Company ; or Deg. Degree. 
 A. A. S. Fellow of the * * \ County. Del. Delaware. 
 
 American Academy. Col. Colonel, [ers. Dept. Deputy. 
 
 A. B. Bachelor of Arts. Com. Commission- Deut Deuteronomy. 
 
 A. D. In the year of Conn, or Ct. Connec- Do. or Ditto. The 
 
 our Lord. ticut. same. 
 
 f Master of Arts; Cor. Corinthians. ^ J Doctor ; or 
 . ,.-. J Before noon ; C. P. S. Keeper of r# ( Debtor. 
 A> ' 1 or In the year the Privy Seal. E. East. 
 
 (^ of the world. C. S. Keeper of the Eccl. Ecclesiastes. 
 
 Apr. April. Seal. -p, , J Edition ; or 
 Aug. August. Cr. Credit, \ Editor. 
 
 Bart. Baronet. Cts. Cents. E. G. For Example. 
 
 B. D. Bachelor of Di- Cwt Hundred -p, { England ; or 
 vinity. weight. °* ( English. 
 
 B. V. Blessed Virgin. D. C. District of Ep. Epistle. 
 
 C. or cent, a hundred. Columbia. Eph. Ephesians. 
 
 Capt. Captain. D. D. Doctor of Di- Esq. Esquire. 
 
 Cash. Cashier. vinity. p { Example ; or 
 Chap. Chapter. Dea. Deacon. ' \ Exodus 
 
 i Chron. Chronicles. Dec. December. Exr. Executor. 
 
 14* 
 
162 
 
 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Feb. February. 
 Fig. Figure. 
 Flor. Florida. 
 F t France ; or 
 
 ' ( Francis. 
 F. R. S. Fellow of the 
 
 Royal Society. 
 Gal. Galatians. 
 
 Geo. | George ; m 
 
 ( Georgia. 
 Gov. Governor. 
 Gen. J General; or 
 
 ( Genesis. 
 Gent. Gentleman. 
 Hon. Honourable. 
 Hund. Hundred. 
 Ibid. In the same place. 
 Ind. Indiana. 
 Inst. Instant. 
 Isa. Isaiah. 
 Jac. Jacob. 
 Jan. January. 
 Josh. Joshua. 
 Jun. Junior, 
 K. King. 
 Km. Kingdom. 
 Kt Knight. 
 T 5 Lord ? °r 
 L ' I Lady. 
 Lat. Latitude, 
 lbs. Pounds. 
 L. C. Lower Canada. 
 Lev. Leviticus. 
 Lieut. Lieutenant. 
 LL. D. Doctor of 
 
 Laws. 
 Lon. Longitude. 
 Lou. Louisiana. 
 L. S. Place of the seal. 
 M. Marquis. 
 Maj. Major. 
 Mass. Massachusetts. 
 Mat. Matthew. 
 Math. Mathematics. 
 M.B. Bachelor of Phy- 
 sic. 
 M. D. Doctor of Physic. 
 Md. Maryland. 
 Me. Maine. 
 
 M t Master ; or 
 
 mx ' I Mister. 
 
 Messrs. j Gentlemen; 
 ( or Sirs. 
 
 Mrs. Mistress. 
 
 M. P. Member of 
 Parliament. 
 
 MS. Manuscript. 
 
 MSS. Manuscripts. 
 
 N. North. 
 
 N. B. Take Notice. 
 
 N. C. North Caro- 
 lina. 
 
 N. H. New Hamp- 
 shire. 
 
 N. J. New Jersey. 
 
 No. Number. 
 
 Nov. November. 
 
 N. S. New Style. 
 
 N. W. T. North 
 Western Terri- 
 tory. 
 
 N. Y. New York. 
 
 O. Ohio. 
 
 Obj. Objection. 
 
 Obt. Obedient. 
 
 Oct. October. 
 
 O. S. Old Style. 
 
 Pari. Parliament. 
 
 Penn. or Pa. Penn- 
 sylvania. 
 
 Per. by the ; (as per 
 yard, by the yard.) 
 
 Per cent. By the hun- 
 dred. 
 
 Pet. Peter. 
 
 Phfl.j». ;or 
 ( PhiJipians. 
 
 Philom. A lover of 
 
 learning. 
 
 ' ' '(or Afternoon. 
 P. O. Post Office. 
 P. S. Postscript. 
 Ps. Psalm. 
 Pres. President. 
 Prof. Professor. 
 £v J Question ; or 
 I Queen. 
 
 Rev. < 
 
 Qr. Quarter. 
 
 Regr. Register. 
 
 Rep. Representa- 
 tive. 
 
 { Revelation ; 
 ( or Reverend, 
 
 Rt. Hon. Right Hon- 
 ourable. 
 
 Rom. Romans. 
 
 R. I. Rhode Island. 
 
 o S South ; or 
 
 °" ( Shilling. 
 
 S. A. South America. 
 
 Sam. Samuel. 
 
 S. C. South Caro- 
 lina. 
 
 Sec. \ | ecti ° n ' w 
 ( Secretary. 
 
 Sen. J jg™£ r ! or 
 
 Sept. September. 
 Serg. Sergeant. 
 Servt. Servant, 
 cu S Saint : or 
 St * Street. 
 S. T. P. Professor of 
 
 Divinity. 
 S. T. D. Doctor of 
 
 Divinity. 
 Tenn. Tennessee. 
 Thess. Thessalo- 
 
 nians. 
 Tho. Thomas. 
 Tim. Timothy. 
 U. C. Upper Canada. 
 Ult. The last. 
 U. S. A. United 
 
 States of America. 
 Va. Virginia. 
 Viz. To wit ; 
 
 namely. 
 Vt, Vermont 
 W. West. 
 W. I. West Indies. 
 Win, William. 
 Wp. Worship. 
 Wt. Weight. 
 Yd. Yard. 
 &c. And so forth. 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 163 
 
 SECTION XC. 
 
 Explanation of the Pauses and Characters used in writing. 
 
 Punctuation is the division of a composition into sentences or parts 
 of sentences, by points or marks denoting a total suspension of the 
 voice during a certain space of time, in order to show more clearly the 
 sense and relation of words. 
 
 The comma ( , ) denotes a pause the time of pronouncing one sylla- 
 ble ; the semicolon, ( ; ) two ; the colon, ( : ) three ; and the period, 
 I.) four. 
 
 (?) The interrogation point is used when a question is asked ; 
 as, " Why do you weep]" 
 
 ( ! ) The exclamation point is used after any thing wonderful or 
 surprising; as, " My friend ! this conduct amazes me!" 
 
 ( ) The parenthesis includes something explanatory, which if left 
 ou£ would not obscure the sense ; and should be read in a quicker and 
 lower tone of voice than the rest of the sentence. 
 
 ] The brackets include a word or sentence which serves to ex- 
 plain something that precedes or follows. 
 
 ( ' ) An apostrophe denotes the omission of one or more letters ; 
 as, lov'd, tho\ for loved, though. It likewise denotes the possessive 
 case ; as, John's hat. 
 
 ( - ) A hyphen joins words or syllables ; as, ink-stand. 
 
 ( " " ) A quotation denotes a passage that is taken from some other 
 author. 
 
 ( a) A caret is used only in writing, to show that a letter or word 
 has been left out ; as, he]^ a dutiful child. 
 
 ( — ) A dash denotes a sudden pause, or a change of subject. 
 
 ( A brace is used to connect several lines or words 
 ( together. 
 
 GCT An index points to some important passage. 
 
 % A paragraph denotes the beginning of a new subject. 
 
 5 A section is used to subdivide chapters. 
 
 * f J || An asterisk and other references refer to some note in the 
 margin or at the bottom of a page. 
 
 Capital Letters. 
 
 Capital letters should be used at the beginning of every book, chap- 
 ter, note, and sentence : they should begin all appellations of the 
 Deity ; proper names of persons, places, rivers, mountains, lakes, &c. 
 and all adjectives derived from proper names ; and the pronoun I, and 
 interjection O ; likewise every line of poetry. 
 
 Whole words are sometimes printed in CAPITALS, to denote 
 their peculiar importance, or to render them conspicuous or em- 
 phatical. 
 
 Small capitals, and Italic characters, are also used for the same 
 purpose ; but denote a less degree of importance or emphasis. 
 
 In writing, words intended for capitals, should have three lines 
 drawn under them ; for small capitals, two ; and for italics, one. 
 
164 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK, 
 
 SECTION XCL 
 
 ERRORS IN PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 A few of the most common errors in pronunciation are here pointed 
 out, for the purpose of directing the attention of learners to this impor- 
 tant subject. Great care is necessary, to form a clear, distinct, and 
 correct articulation, at the very commencement of study. 
 
 The examples here given, embrace but few of the words belonging 
 to each class. 
 
 1. In the first place, the omission of the sound of r, in such words 
 as farm, harm, star, force, floor, more, worth, world, horse, remorse — 
 incorrectly pronounced, fa'm, ha'm, sta\ fo'ce, floo', mo'e, wo'th, 
 wo'ld, ho'se, remo'se. 
 
 2. Adding the sound of r to such words as idea, potato, tobacco — 
 mispronounced, idear, potatur, tobaccur. 
 
 3. Omitting the sound of o in such words as history, memory, vic- 
 tory — mispronounced, hist'ry, mem'ry, vict'ry. 
 
 4. Omitting the sound of e in such words as every, several, totter- 
 ing, utterance, murderer — mispronounced, ev'ry, sev'ral, tott'ring, 
 utt'rance, murd'rer. 
 
 5. Sounding the diphthong ox like long i, in such words as boil, 
 hoist, joint, oil, point, spoil — mispronounced, bile, histe, jinte, ile, pinte, 
 spile. 
 
 6 Omitting the sound of h in such won?s as wheat, what, white, 
 whale, whisper — mispronounced, w'eat, w'at, w'ite, w'ale, w'isper. 
 
 7. Adding the sound of u after I and 7, in such words as elm, 
 helm, alarm, overwhelm — mispronounced, elum s helum, alarumj over- 
 whelm. 
 
 8. Sounding o like u in sucn words as codect, command, complete, 
 confine, correct — mispronounced cuilect ; curamand, cumplete, cun- 
 fine, currect. 
 
 9 Sounding e like u, in such words as silent, prudent, dependence, 
 providence — mispronounced, siiunt, prudunt, dependunce, providunce. 
 
 10. Sounding a like u, in such words as defiance, defendant, de- 
 scendant — mispronounced, defiunce, defendunt, descendunt. 
 
 11. Omitting the sound of g, in the termination \ng ; as in walking, 
 dancing, eating, sleeping, morning, running, resting, writing- incor- 
 rectly pronounced, walkin, dancin, eatin-, sleepin, momin, runnin, 
 restin, wntin. 
 
 SECTION XCI1. 
 
 EQUIVOCAL WORDS; 
 
 EACH OF WHICH HAS SEVERAL DIFFERENT MEANINGS. 
 
 • Ball, b round substance : — -an en- 
 tertainment of dancing. 
 Bank, a heap of earth : — a place 
 where money is kept. 
 
 Base, vile, worthless: — the foun- 
 dation. 
 
 Beam a piece of timber : — a ray of 
 light 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 165 
 
 Bill, the beak of a bird : — an ac- 
 count of money. 
 
 Blade, the sharp part of a weap- 
 on : — a leaf of grass. 
 
 Box, a case or chest : — a blow : — 
 name of a tree. 
 
 Charge, accusation : — expense :— 
 command. 
 
 Coun-ter, a shop table : — contra- 
 ry to. 
 
 Dear, beloved : — expensive. 
 
 Die,to expire : — stamp used in coin- 
 age : — a colour — a small cube. 
 
 Draw, to pull : — to take from a 
 cask : — to delineate. 
 
 Drug, a medicinal simple : — any 
 worthless thing. 
 
 Ear, the organ of hearing: — a 
 spike of corn. 
 
 Fair, beautiful: — just: — a stated 
 market. 
 
 Fast, firm : — swift : — abstinence 
 from food. 
 
 Fig-ure, shape : — a statue : — a nu- 
 merical character. 
 
 Fit, proper : — a paroxysm. 
 
 Flag, a water plant: — a paving 
 stone :— colours or ensigns. 
 
 Foot, the part on which we 
 stand : — twelve inches. 
 
 Game, sport : — a single match at 
 play : — animals chased. 
 
 Grave, a place for the dead : — so- 
 lemn, serious : — to carve. 
 
 Graze, to feed on grass : — to touch 
 lightly. 
 
 Hail, frozen rain : — to salute. 
 
 Hide, to conceal : — the skin of an 
 animal. 
 
 Hop, to jump on one leg : — a 
 climbing plant. 
 
 Kind, benevolent : — a sort. 
 
 Lawn, fine linen : — an open space 
 between woods. 
 
 League, a confederacy : — three 
 miles. 
 
 Let-ter, an alphabetic charac- 
 ter : — a written message. 
 
 Lie, to utter wilful falsehoods: — 
 to rest. 
 
 light, illumination : — not heavy : 
 — to kindle. 
 
 Like, resembling : — to be pleased 
 with. 
 
 Lock, fastening for doors : — a tuft 
 of hair or wool : — works to con- 
 fine water in a canal. 
 
 March, the third month : — to walk 
 in procession. 
 
 Meal, a repast : — the edible part 
 of corn. 
 
 Mean, base, low : — to intend : — to 
 signify. 
 
 Mine, a place containing miner- 
 als : — belonging to me. 
 
 Mint, a plant : — the place where 
 money is coined. 
 
 Nail an iron spike : — the horny 
 substance at the end of the fin- 
 gers and toes. 
 
 Nap, a short sleep : — down on 
 cloth. 
 
 Ner-vous, vigorous : — having 
 weak nerves. 
 
 Ounce, an animal : — a weight. 
 
 Pine, a tree : — to languish. 
 
 Pump, an engine to raise water : — 
 a shoe. 
 
 Race, a generation : — a course at 
 running. 
 
 Re-pair, to mend : — to go to. 
 
 Rest, repose : — remainder. 
 
 Ring, a circle : — to sound. 
 
 Rose, a flower : — did rise. 
 
 Rush, a plant : — to move with vio- 
 lence. 
 
 Sage, a plant : — wise. 
 
 Spring, one of the four seasons : — 
 elastic force : — a fountain. 
 
 Steep, much inclined : — to soak. 
 
 Swal-low, a bird : — to take down 
 the throat. 
 
 Well, a deep narrow pi: of water : 
 — in good health. 
 
 Yard, enclosed ground : — a mea- 
 sure of three feet. 
 
166 THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 SECTION XCIII. 
 
 POLITICAL AND SOCIAL CATECHISM. 
 
 Q. What are your social duties ? 
 
 A. As a citizen of the United States, I am bound to obey the laws 
 of my country. 
 
 Q. What is law ? 
 
 A. Law is a command to do, or not to do, or a permission to do, 
 some act ; and must be made by competent authority. 
 
 Q. For what purpose are laws made ? 
 
 A. For the protection and security of the people and their property 
 against violence, oppression, injustice, and the ungovernable passions 
 of those who would injure and destroy one another, if they were not 
 restrained. 
 
 Q. What is considered the supreme law of the land ? 
 
 A. The Constitution of the United States ; together with all laws 
 and treaties made under its authority. 
 
 Q. What constitutes the United States ? 
 
 A. The United States consist of a union of Twenty-six independ- 
 ent states, besides extensive territories, united under one general 
 government. 
 
 O. What is political government ? 
 
 A. It is the exercise of authority over nations or states, by enforcing 
 or administering such laws as are given in any community. 
 
 Q. What is the government of the United States ? 
 
 A. It is called Republican — which is a free government, and may 
 be considered the happiest and best in the world. 
 
 Q. In whom is the sovereign power vested ? 
 
 A. In the people. They elect their own officers or rulers, who are 
 accountable to them for all their actions. 
 
 Q. Into how many branches is the general government divided ? 
 
 A. Three : the legislative, the executive, and the judicial. 
 
 Q. What is legislative power 7 
 
 A. The power of making laws. 
 
 Q. What is executive power ? 
 
 A. The power of administering, or putting the laws into execution. 
 
 Q. What is the judicial power 7 
 
 A. The power of trying causes, and deciding all matters of con- 
 troversy. 
 
 Q. Who are the principal officers of the United States ? 
 
 A. The president, vice-president, senate, and house of representa- 
 tives ; and the different officers by them appointed. 
 
 Q. hi whom is the executive power vested ? 
 
 A. In the president ; who is placed at the head of the nation. 
 
 Q. How are the president and vice-president chosen ? 
 
 A. They are chosen for four years, by electors appointed for that 
 purpose, in such a manner as each state shall by law direct. 
 
 Q. How are the laws oftlie United States made ? 
 
 A. They are made by the Senate, and House of Representatives ; 
 
THE PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 167 
 
 who are called the " Congress of the United States" — and must be 
 approved and signed by the President.* 
 
 Q. What is the Senate of the United States? 
 
 A. It is composed of two senators from each state ; chosen by the 
 state legislature for six years. 
 
 Q. Who is president of the Senate ? 
 
 A. The vice-president of the United States. 
 
 Q. What is the House of Representatives ? 
 
 A. It consists of members from all the states in the Union ; chosen 
 by the people every two years. 
 
 Q. How often do Congress meet ? 
 
 A. They generally meet once a year ; on the first monday in De- 
 cember. 
 
 Q. Where do they meet ? 
 
 A. At the Capitol, in the city of Washington. 
 
 Q. In whom is the judicial power of the United States vested. 
 
 A. In the Supreme Court of the United States, composed of nine 
 judges ; and in such inferior courts, as Congress may ordain and 
 establish. 
 
 Q. How far does the judicial power extend ? 
 
 A. To all cases in law and equity, arising under the constitution, 
 treaties, and laws of the United States. 
 
 Q. What is the distinction between the National and State Gov- 
 ernments ? 
 
 A. There is a distinct and perfectly organized government, for the 
 whole people of the United States, for certain defined purposes ; in 
 which all the people have a common interest : and there are likewise 
 State Governments for all other purposes, which act within their own 
 limits, and on their own citizens. Every person is, at all times, subject 
 to both these governments. 
 
 Q. What are the State Governments ? 
 
 A. They are representative Republics. 
 
 Q. How are they conducted ? 
 
 A. By written constitutions, adopted by the people, and the laws 
 made under them. 
 
 Q. Into how many branches is each state government divided ? 
 
 A. Three : the legislative, executive, and judicial. 
 
 Q. How are the state laws made 1 
 
 A. Similar to those of the United States. 
 
 Q. Who is the principal officer of each state ? 
 
 A. The Governor. 
 
 Q. How is he appointed ? 
 
 A. In some states, he is elected by the people ; in others by the le- 
 gislature. 
 
 Q. How are the states divided? 
 
 A. Into counties ; and the counties into towns : each of which 
 have their officers. 
 
 * If the President refuse to sign a bill, and two thirds of both branches of • 
 Congress concur, it becomes a law without the President's signature. 
 
168 
 
 THE. PICTORIAL SPELLING-BOOK. 
 
 Q. What is the chief object of law ? 
 
 A. The prevention of crimes, by punishment, for the example of 
 others, with imprisonment and death. 
 
 Q. What are some of the crimes for which death is inflicted. 
 
 A. Murder, piracy, arson, and treason. 
 
 Q. How are crimes not capital, punished ? 
 
 A. By imprisonment in the state prison for life, or for a number of 
 years ; by imprisonment in the common jail, and fine ; by confine- 
 ment in houses of correction, and fine ; or by fine only. 
 
 Q. How is the guilt of an offender ascertained ? 
 
 A. By public trial in a court of law ; in which twelve persons are 
 a sworn jury, to decide whether they all think him guilty, or not 
 guilty. 
 
 Q. Is the duty of a juryman important ? 
 
 A. It is one of the most important duties that a citizen is called 
 upon to perform. The life, liberty, property, and honour of individuals 
 are at his disposal : because every juror must agree to the verdict 
 before it can be pronounced ; and each one is bound to decide accord- 
 ing to his own view of the subject, and not according to the views or 
 wishes of others. 
 
 Q. What are the means of avoiding crimes ? 
 
 A. Constantly to avoid temptation ; always to shun bad or loose 
 company ; never to spend more than your income ; never to do what 
 your conscience tells you is wrong ; and always to remember you are 
 in the presence of your Maker. 
 
 Q. What are the other motives for avoiding crimes ? 
 
 A. The experience of all wicked men, and their frequent declara- 
 tions, that a life of crime is a life of anxiety, trouble, torment, and 
 misery : and also the known fact, that contentment, health, cheerful- 
 ness, and happiness, attend a good conscience, and an honest and vir- 
 tuous life. 
 
 Q. What is the duty of good citizens ? 
 
 A. To be respectful to rulers, and obedient to the laws ; to maintain 
 the public peace ; to earn by honest and useful industry, in their seve- 
 ral callings, the means of subsistence ; to reverence and respect the 
 duties of religion ; and to perform all the relative and social duties of 
 life with honesty and humanity. 
 
 PRESIDENTS OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 Names. 
 
 Born. 
 
 Elected Service, 
 Pres. No. yrs. 
 
 Retired, 
 aged. 
 
 Age. 
 
 1 George Washington, 
 
 2. Jchn Adams, 
 
 3. Thomas Jefferson, 
 
 4. James Madison, 
 
 5. James Monroe, 
 
 6 John Gluincy Adams. 
 
 7. Andrew Jackson, 
 
 8. Marti q Van Buren, 
 
 1732 
 
 1789 
 
 8 
 
 66 
 
 1735 
 
 1797 
 
 4 
 
 66 
 
 1743 
 
 1801 
 
 8 
 
 66 
 
 1751 
 
 1809 
 
 8 
 
 66 
 
 1759 
 
 1817 
 
 8 
 
 66 
 
 1767 
 
 1825 
 
 4 
 
 62 
 
 1767 
 
 1829 
 
 8 
 
 70 
 
 1762 
 
 1837 
 
 
 
 Dec. 14, 1799, 
 July 4, 1826, 
 July 4, 1826, 
 June 28, 1836, 
 July 4, 1831, 
 
 THE END. 
 
 * 111* 
 

 1°\ 
 
 o * + , -%•* <0 *$>. ** , Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
 
 "2^ <%v t * « , «*V Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 
 "^ a^ *^fc#U^!> A Treatment Date: Oct. 2006 
 
 tl *^S^ : PreservationTechnologies 
 
 A/**^ °H/ffii%\xP± ^ C A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 
 ^ <£» J^^^v\ >iY 111 Thomson Park Drive 
 
 <V 
 
 .*<* yjfKi^\ 
 
 
 Cranberry Township, PA 1 6066 r 
 
 (724)779-2111 
 
 O ,4 
 

 
 ^ 
 
 <> »o ,G V 
 
 »* v \ 
 
 .6* .»°.1V- "*b a* v 
 
 Atf 1 
 
 *°«* 
 
 
 
 • .»• 
 
 G v . °o 
 
 
 tm^ 
 
 * • • » - ^V <**